k-7145fs_rev5

7145

Oct. 2003Ver. 2.0

��

��

KMS 714511

Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure ofconfidential information.

©2003 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.

Printed in JapanN40LF0000

KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003 CONTENTS

I A

DJU

STM

ENT

II IS

WIII

SER

VIC

EIV

DIA

GR

AM

S

CONTENTSSAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2

SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

SAFETY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11

INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-13

I ADJUSTMENT

1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11.1 Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS FOR 7145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24. MODE CHANGE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

4.1 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45. CHECKING BY THE COUNTER KEY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

5.1 Checking method of the counter key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46. 25 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

6.1 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76.2 Setting software DIPSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76.3 PM count setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

6.3.1 PM count reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-286.3.2 Entering PM count start date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-286.3.3 Setting of PM cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-286.3.4 Counter clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

6.4 Data collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-296.5 Copy count for each part to be replaced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35

6.5.1 Copy count by parts to be replaced (fixed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-356.5.2 Copy count by parts to be replaced (Named; arbitrarily) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37

6.6 Password setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-396.7 Setting phone number of the service center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-406.8 Setting the serial number/the destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40

6.8.1 Setting the serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-406.8.2 Setting the destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41

6.9 Displaying the ROM version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-416.10 KRDS setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-416.11 ISW setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-416.12 Root counter display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-416.13 Setting date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-426.14 Tray size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42

7. 36 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43

i

CONTENTS KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003

I A

DJU

STM

ENT

II IS

WIII

SER

VIC

EIV

DIA

GR

AM

S

1

7.1 Setting method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-437.2 Process adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-437.3 L detection adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-447.4 Toner density adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-447.5 Dot diameter adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-457.6 LD1 offset adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-457.7 LD2 offset adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-467.8 Timing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47

7.8.1 Vertical/Horizontal magnification adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-477.8.2 Restart timing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-507.8.3 Paper feed loop amount adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-527.8.4 Leading edge original erasure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-537.8.5 Centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-547.8.6 Image read point adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-567.8.7 Recall standard data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57

7.9 Running test mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-577.9.1 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58

7.10 Test pattern output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-587.11 Test pattern density adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-637.12 Image quality adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63

7.12.1 RADF scanning density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-637.12.2 Non-image area erase check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64

7.13 List print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-657.14 Counter clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-667.15 Adjustment of RADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66

7.15.1 Vertical magnification adjustment in RADF system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-667.15.2 Adjustment of restart timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-677.15.3 Paper feed loop adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-687.15.4 Centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-687.15.5 RADF scanning density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-697.15.6 RADF image read point adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69

7.16 FNS adjustment (FS-112 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-697.17 FNS adjustment (FS-114 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70

7.17.1 Fold & Stitch position adjustment (SK-114) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-707.17.2 Fold position adjustment (SK-114) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-717.17.3 Punch position adjustment (PK-114) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-717.17.4 Punch loop adjustment (PK-114) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72

8. 47 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-738.1 47 mode setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-738.2 RADF original size detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-748.3 By-pass size detection adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-748.4 Action for mounting when reinstalling the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-748.5 Input check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-758.6 Output check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80

9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-849.1 RADF height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-849.2 RADF distortion adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85

ii

KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003 CONTENTS

I A

DJU

STM

ENT

II IS

WIII

SER

VIC

EIV

DIA

GR

AM

S

9.3 RADF original skew adjustment (front side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-869.4 RADF original skew adjustment (back side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-879.5 DB-411 paper-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-899.6 DB-411 tray tilt adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-909.7 LT tray tilt adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-919.8 FS-113 Output Check Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-939.9 Lengthwise position adjustment of punch hole of FS-113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-989.10 Adjustment of FS-113 Solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-999.11 FS-113 Timing Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1009.12 FS-113 Adjustment of the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1019.13 Adjustment of FS-113 Elevator Tray Overload Detection Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1029.14 Staple Position Adjustment of FS-114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1039.15 Adjustment of the Installation Position of the Shutter Drive Gear of FS-114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1049.16 Punch Hole Deviance Adjustment of FS-114 (PK-114). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1059.17 Fold Angle Adjustment of SK-114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1069.18 Staple Angle Adjustment of SK-114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107

II ISW

1. DESCRIPTION OF THE ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12. SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

III SERVICE

1. SERVICE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11.1 Service schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11.2 Maintenance items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31.3 Periodic check items (main body) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81.4 Periodic check items (DF-318) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101.5 Periodic check items (DB-211) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101.6 Periodic check items (DB-411) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101.7 Periodic check items (LT-203). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111.8 Periodic check items (FS-112) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111.9 Replacement parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-121.10 Important maintenance parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

2. 1 PM PARTS KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-143. SERVICE MATERIALS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-154. CE TOOLS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

IV DIAGRAMS

1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11.1 7145 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11.2 DF-318 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131.3 DB-211 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141.4 DB-411 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151.5 LT-203 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161.6 FS-112 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-171.7 RU-101 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

iii 1

CONTENTS KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003

I A

DJU

STM

ENT

II IS

WIII

SER

VIC

EIV

DIA

GR

AM

S

1

1.8 IT-101 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-202. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

2.1 7145 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-212.2 DF-318 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-252.3 DB-211 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-252.4 DB-411 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-262.5 LT-203 connector layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-272.6 FS-112 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-272.7 RU-101 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

3. JAM CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-284. ERROR CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

4.1 Error code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-354.2 About abnormal units isolation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-624.3 L detection error code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-634.4 Network section status indication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63

5. TIMING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-645.1 7145 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-645.2 7145 ADU timing chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-655.3 DF-318 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-665.4 DB-211/DB-411 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-685.5 LT-203 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-695.6 FS-112 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-705.7 FS-113 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-725.8 FS-114 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-765.9 SK-114 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78

6. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-796.1 DF-318 Overall Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-796.2 DB-211/411 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-806.3 LT-203 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-816.4 FS-112 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-836.5 RU-101 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-856.6 FS-113 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-876.7 SK-114 Overall Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

7. APPENDIX7.1 7145 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-17.2 7145 Overall Wiring Diagram (2/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-27.3 7145 Overall Wiring Diagram (3/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-37.4 7145 Overall Wiring Diagram (4/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-47.5 FS-114 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-6

iv

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing ser-vice work.

Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this copier as well as the risk of damage tothe copier, Konica Minolta Business Technologies, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends thatall servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians.Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed.Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this ServiceManual is complete and accurate.The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the copier while ser-vicing the copier for which this Service Manual is intended.Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technicaltraining and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the copier properly.Keep this Service Manual also for future service.

In this Service Manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and “ CAUTION” is definedas follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning. When servicing the copier, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance,etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.

Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:


IMPORTANT NOTICE

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING ANDCAUTION

DANGER :Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

WARNING:Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury

CAUTION :Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, andproperty damage

:Precaution when using the copier.General precaution Electric hazard High temperature

:Prohibition when using the copier.General prohibition Do not touch with wet hand Do not disassemble

:Direction when using the copier.General instruction Unplug Ground/Earth

S-1 1


[1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.

Konica Minolta brand copiers are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality designand a solid service network.Copier design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical aspectshave to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unau-thorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are thereforestrictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind this policy.

SAFETY WARNINGS

DANGER : PROHIBITED ACTIONS

• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.

• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT. Safety will not beassured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.

• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, sol-der or similar object.

• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)

• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not beassured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.

• Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by KMBT

• Using parts not specified by KMBT

S-21


[2] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICEKonica Minolta brand copiers are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met,in order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in dailyuse, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability,the CE must perform regular safety checks.1.Power Supply

WARNING: Wall Outlet• Check that mains voltage is as specified. Plug the power cord into the dedi-

cated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consump-tion.

If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.

• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total loadmust not exceed the rating of the wall outlet.

If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.

WARNING: Power Plug and Cord

• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely.Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and therisk of fire.

• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath isdamaged.

If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new powercord (with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBT. Using the damagedpower cord may result in fire or electric shock.

• When using the power cord (inlet type) that came with this copier, be sure toobserve the following precautions: a. Make sure the copier-side power plug is securely inserted in the socket

on the rear panel of the copier.Secure the cord with a fixture properly.

b. If the power cord or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord(with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBT. If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the copier securely, acontact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and riskof fire.

• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table andso on.

Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.

kw

S-3 1


• Do not bundle or tie the power cord. Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.

• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet.Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result infire.

• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand.The risk of electric shock exists.

• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable.The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.

WARNING: Wiring

• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same out-let.

If used, the risk of fire exists.

• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too longextension cord may result in fire.Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire mayresult.

WARNING: Ground Lead• Check whether the copier is grounded properly.

If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded copier, you may suffer electricshock while operating the copier. Connect the ground lead to one of thefollowing points:a. Ground terminal of wall outletb. Ground terminal for which Class D work has been done

WARNING: Power Plug and Cord

S-4


2.Installation Requirements

• Pay attention to the point to which the ground lead is connected.Connecting the ground lead to an improper point such as the points listedbelow results in a risk of explosion and electric shock:a. Gas pipe (A risk of explosion or fire exists.)b. Lightning rod (A risk of electric shock or fire exists.)c. Telephone line ground (A risk of electric shock or fire exists in the caseof lightning.)d. Water pipe or faucet (It may include a plastic portion.)

WARNING: Prohibited Installation Place• Do not place the copier near flammable materials such as curtains or volatile

materials that may catch fire.A risk of fire exists.

• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to water such as rain water.A risk of fire and electric shock exists.

WARNING: Nonoperational Handling

• When the copier is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.),switch it off and unplug the power cord.

Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.

CAUTION: Temperature and Humidity• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to direct sunlight or near a heat

source such as a heater.A risk of degradation in copier performance or deformation exists.Do not place the copier in a place exposed to cool wind.Recommended temperature and humidity are as follows:Temperature: 10°C to 30°C

Humidity: 10% to 80% (no dew condensation)Avoid other environments as much as possible.

CAUTION: Ventilation• Do not place the copier in a place where there is much dust, cigarette

smoke, or ammonia gas.Place the copier in a well ventilated place to prevent machine problemsand image faults.

WARNING: Ground Lead

S-5


• The copier generates ozone gas during operation, but it is not sufficient to beharmful to the human body.

If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate theroom.a. When the copier is used in a poorly ventilated roomb. When taking a lot of copiesc. When using multiple copiers at the same time

CAUTION: Vibration• When installing the copier, read the Installation Guide thoroughly. Be sure to

install the copier in a level and sturdy place.Constant vibration will cause problems.

• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.In the case of an earthquake and so on, the copier may slide, leading to ainjury.

CAUTION: Inspection before Servicing• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service

manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following theprescribed procedure, using only the prescribed tools. Do not make anyadjustment not described in the documentation.

If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the copier may break and arisk of injury or fire exists.

• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs fromthe copier and options.

When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still pow-ered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shockexists.

• The area around the fixing unit is hot.You may get burnt.

DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered• Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check

with the copier powered.If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the externalcover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may becaught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.

CAUTION: Ventilation

S-61


• Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached.High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.

WARNING: Safety Checkpoints• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages.

The user or CE may be injured.

• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into thecopier.

They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire.

• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

• When disconnecting connectors, grasp the connector, not the cable.(Specifically, connectors of the AC line and high-voltage parts)Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and elec-trode units such as a charging corona unit.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of copier trouble or fire.

• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration andsign of leakage.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.

• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit incorporating a laser, makesure that the power cord has been disconnected.

The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.

• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the writeunit shifted from the specified mounting position.

The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.

• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery speci-fied in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using themethod specified by local authority.

Improper replacement can cause explosion.

DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered

S-7


WARNING: Safety Checkpoints

• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp andfixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.

A risk of fire exists.

• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether theinterlock functions properly.

If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or beinjured when you insert your hand in the copier (e.g., for clearing paperjam).

• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, orother pointed parts.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that wereremoved for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the orig-inal location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,forgotten screws, etc.)

A risk of copier trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.

DANGER: HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not

to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact witheyes, etc. It may be stimulative.

If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately.When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.

• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.You may be burned due to dust explosion.

S-8


[3] MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency measures to

provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried out quickly

and KMBT must be notified.3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site checks, in

accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in “Serious Accident Report/

Follow-up Procedures”.

[4] CONCLUSION1. Safety of users and customer engineers depends highly on accurate maintenance and administration. Therefore,

safety can be maintained by the appropriate daily service work conducted by the customer engineer.2. When performing service, each copier on the site must be tested for safety. The customer engineer must verify the

safety of parts and ensure appropriate management of the equipment.

DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) arehighly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.

• Do not replace the cover or turn the copier ON before any solvent remnantson the cleaned parts have fully evaporated.


• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill anyliquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off.


• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.

S-9 1


The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implementedregulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products mar-keted in the United States.

This copier is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S.Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the RadiationControl for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined withinprotective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user opera-tion.

SAFETY INFORMATION

IMPORTANT INFORMATION

S-10


This machine is provided with the following safety circuitsto prevent machine faults from resulting in serious acci-dents.

[1] Overall protection circuit[2] L2 and L3 (fixing heater lamp/1, /2) overheat-

ing prevention circuit

These safety circuits are described below to provide theservice engineer with a renewed awareness of them inorder to prevent servicing errors that may impair theirfunctions.

[1] Overall protection circuit

1. Protection by CBR1 and CBR2 (circuitbreaker/1, /2)CBR1 and CBR2 interrupt the AC line instanta-neously when an excessive current flows due to ashort in the AC line.

CAUTION: The CBR1 and CBR2 functions must not be deactivated under any circumstances.

[2] L2 and L3 (fixing heater lamp/1, /2)overheating prevention circuit

1. Protection by softwareThe output voltage from TH1, TH2 (fixing temper-ature sensor/1, /2) is read by the CPU. If this volt-age is abnormal, L2 (fixing heater lamp/1), L3(fixing heater lamp/2) and RL1 (main relay) areturned OFF.

CAUTION: The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.

SAFETY CIRCUITS

DCPS

CBR1

CBR2

DCPS

CB

L3L2

AC driversection

RL1

FCB

Controlsection

TH1

TH2

RL1 TS

S-11


2. Protection by the hardware circuitThe output voltages from TH1, TH2 (fixing tem-perature sensor/1, /2) are compared with the abnor-mality judgment reference value in the comparatorcircuit. If the output voltage from TH1 or TH2exceeds the reference value, L2 (fixing heater lamp/1), L3 (fixing heater lamp/2) and RL1 (main relay)are turned OFF in hardware means.

CAUTION: Periodically check the TH1, TH2 face contacting the roller, and replace TH2 if any abnormality is detected.The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.

3. Protection by TS (thermostat)When the fixing heat roller exceeds the specifiedvalue, TSs (thermostats) are turned OFF, thus inter-rupting the power to L2 (fixing heater lamp/1), andL3 (fixing heater lamp/2) directly.

CAUTION: Do not use any other electrical conductor in place of TS1 and TS2. Do not change the distance between the fixing heat roller and TS (thermostat).

S-12


Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine.When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns and electricshock.

CAUTION

INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-self away from.Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read, contact our Service Office.

CAUTION

The fixing unit is very hot.To avoid getting burned DO NOT TOUCH.

CAUTION

This area is very hot.To avoid getting burned DO NOT TOUCH.

CAUTION

This area generates high voltage. If touched, electrical shock may occur. DO NOT TOUCH!

CAUTION

To avoid injury, DO NOT put your hand on the topof the printed sheets. Be sure to hold both sidesof the printed sheets when removing them, andDO NOT leave your hand on the printed sheetswhile the primary (main) tray goes up.

CAUTION

The roller shaft on the insideof the cover is very hot.To avoid getting burned DONOT TOUCH.If the cover comes off, returnit to its original position.

(Inside of the main body right side door)

(Inside of the Finisher)

FS-113 Finisher

S-13


CAUTION


7145sf001

S-141


��

CAUTION


S-15


Blank page

S-16

I A

DJU

STM

ENT

KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003 HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION

I ADJUSTMENT

1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION

1.1 Composition

This section details adjusting items and procedures.

A. Checking before starting workUse this section for making adjustments and asa checklist before implementing correctivemeasures in the field.

1. Does the power supply meet the requirements?2. Is the power supply properly grounded?3. Is the machine sharing its power source with

another high current consumption machine thatdraws large currents intermittently? (e.g. an ele-vator, air conditioner, or other source of electri-cal consumption)

4. Is the installation environment suitable?• The machine must be installed in a wellventi-

lated place free from high temperature, highhumidity and direct sunlight.

• The machine must be installed on a levelfloor.

5. Does the cause of a defective image lie in theoriginal itself?

6. Is the density adjusting control at the properposition?

7. Are the platen glass and the slit glass clean?8. Is the correct paper being used for the copy?9. Are the copying materials and parts replaced

when they reach the end of their usable life?(developer, drum, cleaning blade, etc.)

10. Is there toner in the toner bottle?

B. Checkpoints when conducting on-site ser-viceBe sure to pay due attention to the followingwhen repairing the machine.

1. Only one side of the AC power line is discon-nected when the main power of this machine isturned off. Always unplug the machine beforebeginning work. If absolutely necessary to workwith the power on, exercise care to avoid beingcaught in the scanning rear of the exposure unit.

2. Special care should be taken when handling thefixing unit since it operates at extremely hightemperatures.

3. The developing unit is surrounded by a strongmagnetic field. Keep watches and meteringequipment away from it.

4. Avoid scarring the drum with tools or similarobjects.

5. Do not touch IC pins with your bare hands.

2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS

Adjustments (including checks) and settings are notonly required when a defective copy image occurs,but also after replacing or reinstalling certain parts.

[How to use the tables]The following items are used in the tables through-out this section.1. Mode

Indicates the adjustment mode.“25” : 25 mode“36” : 36 mode“47” : 47 mode

2. Symbols used in the tables, ................. : Indicates there is a pri-

ority sequence foradjustments (includingchecks) and settings.

(Empty circle) : Indicates adjustments(including checks) andsettings that can be car-ried out independently.

1-1

I A

DJU

STM

ENT

LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS FOR 7145 KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003

3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS FOR 7145

Adjustment classification Adjustment items

Mod

e

Page

Dru

m

Dev

elop

er

Fixi

ng u

nit-r

elat

ed p

arts

Writ

e un

it

Para

met

er m

emor

y bo

ard

Pape

r fee

ding

-rela

ted

rubb

er ro

llers

RAD

FR

ADF

slit

glas

sE-

RD

H

1 PM counter resetting 25 1-28

2 PM cycle set 25 1-28

3 Process adjustment L detection adjustment 36 1-44 *1 *2

4 Process adjustment Toner density adjustment 36 1-44

5 Process adjustment Dot diameter adjustment 36 1-45

6 Process adjustment LD1 offset adjustment 36 1-45

7 Process adjustment LD2 offset adjustment 36 1-46

8 Image adjustment Magnification adjustment

Vertical magnifi-cation of printer

36 1-47


Vertical magnifi-cation of scan-

ner (platen)36 1-49


Vertical magnifi-cation of scan-

ner (RADF)36 1-50


Horizontal mag-nification of

scanner36 1-49

12 Image adjustment Timing adjust-ment

Main body related

36 1-51


RADF36 1-51


Paper feed loop amount adjust-

ment36 1-52


Leading edge original erasure

adjustment36 1-53

1-2

I A

DJU

STM

ENT

KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003 LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS FOR 7145


Image read point adjustment

36 1-56

17 Image adjustment Centering adjustment

Main body related Centering adjust-

ment36 1-54


DBLT centering adjustment

36 1-54


RADF centering adjustment

36 1-56

20 Image adjustment RADF adjust-ment

RADF scanner density adjust-

ment36 1-63

21 Drum count resetting Drum count resetting 25/36 1-38

22 Fixing unit related counter resetting

Fixing unit related counter resetting

25/36 1-66

23 E-RDH memory check

E-RDH memory check47 1-83

*1 After replacing the developer, be sure that you do not make any copies until you have first carried out Ldetection adjustment.

*2 When PRMB (Parameter memory board) is replaced, remember to replaced the developer before con-ducting the L deection adjustment.

Note:• When replacing a board due to the SCB (System control board) being damaged, the PRMB (Parameter

memory board) that was installed on the damaged SCB should be used as a rule on the new SCB.The use of a new PRMB should be limited only when it is considered that the PRMB is also damaged.On this occasion, adjustment data have not been input into the new PRMB and it is necessary to imple-ment all of the adjustment items. In order to make the new PRMB effective, the 47 mode - 92 (output)should be carried out before implementation of the adjustment items.

• When the adjustment items have been implemented, the 47 mode - 96 (output) should be also executed.The adjustment data are backed up by implementing the 47-96 mode.

• For the original PRMB installed on the damaged SCB, the 47-92 mode is protected against inadvertentexecution. For details of the cancellation of protection, contact the service manager of the authorized dis-tributor.

Adjustment classification Adjustment items

Mod

e

Page

Dru

m

Dev

elop

er

Fixi

ng u

nit-r

elat

ed p

arts

Writ

e un

it

Para

met

er m

emor

y bo

ard

Pape

r fee

ding

-rela

ted

rubb

er ro

llers

RAD

FR

ADF

slit

glas

sE-

RD

H

1-3 1

I A

DJU

STM

ENT

MODE CHANGE MENU KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003

4. MODE CHANGE MENU

4.1 Setting method

The following modes can be selected on the modechange menu screen without turning OFF/ON thepower supply:“1 Basic screen”“2 36 mode”“3 25 mode”“4 Key operation mode”“5 47 mode”“6 Exit”

A. Procedure1. Turn on SW1 (main power switch) and SW2

(sub power switch).2. Keep pressing the ∗ button until the message

“Enter password for mode selection” appears.3. Input 9272 as the password and press the

[START] key. (The password is fixed and cannotbe changed.)

4. Press the key of the mode to be selected on thescreen.

5. To return to the “Mode Change Menu screen”,keep pressing the ∗ button until the “ModeChange Menu screen” appears.

6. When the adjustment ends, press [6. Exit] keyand the basic screen will appear.

5. CHECKING BY THE COUNTER KEY FUNCTION

The Counter key function enables to display of thefollowing parameters by using the counter button:“1 Total count”“2 Total count start date”“3 PM count/PM count limit”“4 PM count start date”“5 Fax send paper count”“6 Fax receive paper count”“7 Printer count”“8 Scanner count”“9 Drum count”“10 Developing count”“11 Fixing unit count”

5.1 Checking method of thecounter key function

A. Procedure1. Turn on SW1 (main power switch) and SW2

(sub power switch).2. Press the counter button.3. The “Counter confirmation screen” appears, and

the total count value appears. The counter thatappears differs depending upon the installedoption.

4. If you press the ! button on the “Counter confir-mation screen”, service-related counters thatindicate the PM count, and so on, appear.

5. To output the count value list, press the [PRINT]key.

6. Press the [OK] key or the stop button to return tothe basic screen.

1-4

I A

DJU

STM

ENT

KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003 25 MODE

6. 25 MODE

Adjustment item menu Remarks

1. Software DIPSW setting

See the “List of soft-ware DIPSW”.

2. PM COUNT/CYCLE 1. PM COUNT reset

2. PM CYCLE set

3. Counter clear 1. Drum related counter

3. Counter clear 2. Fixing related counter

3. Collecting data 1. Count data collection

Data Collection 1Copy count of each paper sizeRADF paper passage count

1. Count data collection

Data Collection 2JAM occurrence count by each point


Data Collection 3Copy count of each mode


Data Collection 4SC count : F code

2. Periodic data collection starts

4. Parts counter 1. Count of parts (Fixed)

2. Count of parts (Named)

5. Password setting 1. Key operator password setting 4 digits

2. User account (EKC) master key code setting 8 digits

3. Weekly timer master key code setting 4 digits

6. Service TEL No. setting

Telephone & Fax. No. of service center set-ting.

7. Serial number setting

1. Main body Sets up the serial number display and the destination.

2. Optional tray

3. LCT

4. Finisher

5. Fax

6. Printer

7. FL-102

1-5

I A

DJU

STM

ENT

25 MODE KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003

.

8. Indication of ROM version

Display each version of ROM.

9. KRDS setting See the KRDS man-ual provided sepa-rately.

10. ISW Rewrites the con-tents of the flash ROM of each board.

11. Indication of Root counter

Displays the root coun-ter (total counter).

12. Setting date Sets the starting date of the total counter.

13. Tray size setting Set the paper size of LT-203.

Adjustment item menu Remarks

1-6

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


6.1 Setting method

A special operating mode called “25 Mode” hasbeen provided with this machine. This modeenables rewriting of the non-volatile storage andspecify other various settings.

A. Procedure1. Turn OFF the SW2 (sub power switch) when the

SW1 (main power switch) remains ON.2. Turn the SW2 ON while pressing 2 and 5 of the

copy quantity setting buttons. The 25 modemenu screen will appear.In the 25 mode normal copy operation becomesunavailable.

3. Press the desired item key on the LCD screen.Each setting screen will appear.

4. Enter data in each selected screen.5. Press the [RETURN] key to check the data that

has been entered.6. Turn the SW2 off to cancel the 25 mode.7. New data will be effective after restarting.

6.2 Setting software DIPSW

A. Setting methodThis setting specifies the software DIPSW onthe software SW setting screen.

Note:• The bit of the DIP switch is written in the non-vol-

atile memory every time it is changed.

B. Meaning of the values displayed on thescreen

C. Procedure1. Enter the 25 Mode.2. “25 mode menu screen”

Press the [Software SW] key.3. “Software setting screen”

Select DIP switch number.Use the arrow key on the left.

4. Select bit number of the DIP switch.Use the arrow key at the center.

5. Select ON (=1) or OFF (=0) of the DIP switch.Use [ON] or [OFF] key.[ON] : Set bit.[OFF] : Clear bit.

6. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “25mode menu screen”.

• For each switch function, see “List of softwareDIPSW”.

[1] DIPSW number[2] Bit number (0 to 7)[3] Bit data : 1:ON, 0:OFF[4] 8-bit switch values in indicated in hexadec-

imals from 00 to FF.

[1] [2] [3] [4]

1-7

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


List of software DIP SW

Note:• Be sure not to change bits with no particular reference made of the function.

DIPSW No. Bit Functions 0 1 Default values

Japan Inch Metric

DIPSW1 0 Operation when key counter is removed

Ignore Instantaneous stop Jam

0 1 1

1 A3 (11 x 17) counting method

Count as 1 Count as 2 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 Selection of maximum num-ber of copies that can be sta-pled by FS-112/113

*1 *1 0 0 0

4 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 FS-112 limit on number of stapled sets

None Message displayed after stopping tem-porarily at 25 cop-

ies.

0 0 0

DIPSW2 0 Toner replenish stop timing 1 Decide with DIPSW 3-2

Stop after paper exited

0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 1 1 1

3 — — — 1 1 1

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 1-shot message display at auto-matic staple mode clearing

Yes No 1 1 1

6 — — — 1 1 1

7 Prohibition of non-image area erases, repeat (auto) and original position correc-tion

No Yes 0 0 0

DIPSW3 0 Use F4 size for Latin Amer-ica destination

No Yes 0 0 0

1 SC latch (F34/F35/F36) Unlatched Latched 0 0 0

2 Toner replenish stop timing 2 When copying ends

Interval between copy set

0 0 0

1-8

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


DIPSW3 3 Return to EKC screen after copying reservation

No Yes 0 0 0

4 — — — 1 1 1

5 By-pass feed non-standard size selection

Size detection effective

Treated as a non-standard

size (to be cop-ied as maximum

size)

0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW4 0 Toner level detection (“Supply toner” indication)

*2 *2 0 0 0

1 0 0 0

2 Condition for stopping copy-ing after toner supply display

*3 *3 1 1 1

3 1 1 1

4 Non-display of advance/delete buttons for job list

Yes No 0 0 0

5 Job stop when there is no toner left.

No Yes 1 1 1

6 Copy reservation allowed (cor-responding to coin vendor)

Can reserve copying

Cannot reverse copying

0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW5 0 — — — 0 1 0

1 — — — 0 0 1

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 Toner consumption reduction SW

*5 *5 0 0 0

6 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW6 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 K size selection SW for Tai-wan destination

Metric sizes K sizes available

0 0 0

2 K size selection SW for Taiwan destination (By pass feed)

Metric sizes K sizes available

0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0


Japan Inch Metric

1-9 1

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


DIPSW6 4 Timing for the polygon motor to stop/start to rotate at low speed

*6 *6 0 0 0

5 1 1 1

6 Setting for the polygon motor to stop/rotate at low speed

*7 *7 1 1 1

7 0 0 0

DIPSW7 0 Selection of automatic era-sure outside original

*8 *8 1 1 1

1 Automatic restart after feed-ing paper (Other than Inch)

*9 *9 0 0 0

2 Automatic conversion of paper size detected by APS (8.5 x 11/A4)

*10 *10 1 0 0

3 Nonstandard-size notifica-tion for platen APS A4 (Japan, Metric)/8.5x11 (Inch)

*11 *11 0 0 0

4 Nonstandard-size notifica-tion for platen APS B6 (Japan)/A5 (Metric)/5.5 x 8.5 (Inch)

*11 *11 0 0 0

5 Password that requires 25/36/47 mode (9272)

Not required Required 0 0 0

6 Selection of A series size (Metric only)

No Yes 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW8 0 — — — 1 0 0

1 Changing of key operator fixed magnification setting

Permit Prohibit 1 0 0

2 Disabling copying when PM count reached


3 — — — 0 0 0

4 Priority tray when APS is released

*12 *12 0 0 0

5 0 0 0

6 0 0 0

7 For checking the collected data 2 to 4 in the 25 mode

Display restricted

Display not restricted

0 0 0


Japan Inch Metric

1-10

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


DIPSW9 0 Selection of copy quantity limit

*13 *13 0 0 0

1 0 0 0

2 0 0 0

3 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 Switching of message *14 *14 0 0 0

7 0 0 0

DIPSW10 0 Setting for summer time *15 *15 0 0 0

1 1 1 1

2 1 1 1

3 0 0 0

4 Selection of magnification mode when APS function is cancelled

Display auto 1.00 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 Icon display in the LCD mes-sage display section (toner shortage, PM)

No Yes 1 0 0

7 Displaying of JAM code No Yes 0 0 0

DIPSW11 0 Release of the applied func-tion when the RADF is open

No Yes 0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0


Japan Inch Metric

1-11

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


DIPSW12 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 Setting of PM count at which copying is inhibited

*16 *16 0 0 0

4 0 0 0

5 0 0 0

6 KRDS connection recogni-tion

Not recognize Recognize 0 0 0

7 F/E code screen switchover (except for F34, F35 and F36)

No Switched (all in F code)

0 0 0

DIPSW13 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 Selection of filter for jagged edges on slanting lines

ON OFF 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 Judging level of the out-of-original auto erasure mode

*17 *17 1 1 1

7 0 0 0

DIPSW14 0 Operation when stapling is not possible (Other than B6R, post card nonstandard)*

*18 *18 0 1 0

1 0 1 0

2 — — — 0 1 0

3 — — — 0 1 0

4 Operation when one position stapling is not available*

*19 *19 0 0 0

5 0 0 0

6 Operation when two position stapling is not available*

*20 *20 0 0 0

7 0 0 0

* Common to FS-112/113


Japan Inch Metric

1-12

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


DIPSW15 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 Stopping due to overloading when the FNS is not connected (when exiting 100 sheets)

Not stop Stop 0 0 0

7 Stopping due to overloading when the FNS, IT is not connected (when exiting 400 sheets)

Decided on DIPSW15-6

Stop 1 1 1

DIPSW16 0 Fixing temperature at low power mode

*21 *21 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

2 Operation of internal heater Always ON Heater off while in off mode

1 1 1

3 Copying before execution of the L detection


4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 Control of dot diameter adjustment

*22 *22 1 1 1

7 0 0 0

DIPSW17 0 F4 size setting *23 *23 0 0 0

1 0 0 0

2 0 0 0

3 HOST printing cannot be performed when a key counter is installed

Printing takes place

Printer abort processing

0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 Shift from by-pass feed in ATS mode is inhibited

Shift inhibited Shift possible 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 Separation claw operation OFF mode (for machines destined for China)

Normal OFF 0 0 0


Japan Inch Metric

1-13 1

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


DIPSW18 0 Tray 1 (main body upper stage), separation of defec-tive part

Normal Not allowed to use

0 0 0

1 Tray 2 (main body lower stage), separation of defec-tive part


0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0

4 Tray 3 (DB upper stage), separation of defective part


0 0 0

5 Tray 4 (DB lower stage), separation of defective part


0 0 0

6 Tray 5 (LT), separation of defective part


0 0 0

7 DB is isolated Normal Not allowed to use

0 0 0

DIPSW19 0 Separation of defective part of printer controller


0 0 0

1 Separation of defective part of FAX board


0 0 0

2 Separation of defective part of FL-102


0 0 0

3 Separation of defective part of HDD


0 0 0

4 Separation of defective part of ADU


0 0 0

5 Separation of defective part of scanner


0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 Separation of defective part of RADF


0 0 0


Japan Inch Metric

1-14

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


DIPSW20 0 Separation of defective part of Network


0 0 0

1 Separation of defective part of IEEE1284


0 0 0

2 Separation of defective part of USB


0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0

4 Separation of defective part of FNS

Normal Not allowed to use (Offset not allowed to use)

0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW21 0 Platen size recognition selector switch 1 for Latin America (Inch only)

8.5 x 11 A4 0 0 0

1 Platen size recognition selector switch 2 for Latin America (Inch only)

8.5 x 11R A4R 0 0 0

2 Platen size recognition selector switch 3 for Latin America (Inch only)

8.5 x 14 F4 0 0 0

3 Notice of nonstandard small platen size (Inch only)

Notice of noticed size

Notice as non-standard size

0 0 0

4 Job suspension/end at pull-ing out key counter

*24 *24 0 0 0

5 Notice of small size of platen mode (8.5x11/A4 or smaller)

Notice size detected by

APS

Notice size as A4 (Japan, Met-

ric) or 8.5x11 (Inch)

0 0 0

6 Switching of the count-up function

*25 *25 0 0 0

7 When using an EKC, the password screen appears at the end of each job

No Yes 0 0 0


Japan Inch Metric

1-15

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


1

DIPSW22 0 — — — 1 1 1

1 Nonstandard size becomes effective at automatic platen start

*26 *26 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0

4 Indication of total count start day on counter key mode screen

No Yes 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 — — — 1 1 1

DIPSW23 0 Automatic changeover to Tray 1 when FNS tray is full*

No Yes 1 1 1

1 Automatic changeover to Tray 2 when FNS tray is full*

No Yes 1 1 1


No Yes 1 1 1


No Yes 1 1 1

4 100 sheets are exited when FNS is not stapled, and tray is detected full*

No Yes 0 0 0

5 100 sheets are exited when FNS is stapled, and tray is detected full*

No Yes 1 1 1

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 Machine stops when fixing web count reaches to the limit

No Yes 0 0 0

* FS-112 only


Japan Inch Metric

1-16

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


DIPSW24 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 Automatic change of printer paper size

*27 *27 0 0 0

3 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 1 0

5 — — — 0 0 1

6 Punching of mixed size print job

Release punch automatically

Not release punch and continue

0 0 0

7 Job stop changeover without print process stop

*29 *29 0 0 0

DIPSW25 0 Automatic changeover to tray 1 when the IT tray is full

No Yes 0 0 0

1 Automatic changeover to tray 2 when the IT tray is full

No Yes 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 Switching of TSL control Normal on/off All off 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 For postcard-to-postcard copying, rotation takes place even when APS/AMS is not used

No Yes 0 0 0

6 180 degree rotation takes place even when there are no staples

No Yes 0 0 0

7 FAX transmission 8K/16K for machines destined for Tai-wan

Image is trans-mitted in

reduced form

Image is trans-mitted with both edges erased

0 0 0

DIPSW26 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 1 1 1

3 Image position reference use for by-pass feed copying on non-standard size paper

Center Rear side of transfer paper

0 0 0

4 Printer EKC mismatch print operation


5 — — — 0 0 0


Japan Inch Metric

1-17 1

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


1

DIPSW26 6 The timer for canceling a job that was interrupted due to removal of the key counter is valid

Disabled Enabled 0 0 0

7 Scanner function Yes No 0 0 0

DIPSW27 0 Automatic copying reserva-tion function

*30 *30 0 0 0

1 Paper exit function with face up in the double sided copy mode (corresponding to let-ter head paper)

Not provided Provided 0 0 0

2 Permission SW for copying double sided special paper


3 — — — 0 0 0

4 Image rotation control when using scanner

Only those smaller than A4/

letter rotate

Those larger than A4/letter

also rotate

0 0 0

5 Density setting when the printer toner save function is selected

*31 *31 0 0 0

6 0 0 0

7 0 0 0

DIPSW28 0 Leading edge position adjustment at image rotation

*37 *37 0 0 0

1 0 0 0

2 0 0 0

3 0 0 0

4 Image leading edge adjust-ment in platen memory copy

*38 *38 0 0 0

5 0 0 0

6 0 0 0

7 0 0 0

DIPSW29 0 Selection of the transfer/sep-aration output of user paper (tray)

*32 *32 0 0 0

1 0 0 0

2 1 1 1

3 TSL control of user paper (tray)

*33 *33 0 0 0

4 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 — — — 1 1 1

7 — — — 0 0 0


Japan Inch Metric

1-18

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


DIPSW30 0 Selection of the transfer/sep-aration output of user paper (by-pass)

*34 *34 0 0 0

1 0 0 0

2 0 0 0

3 TSL control of user paper (by-pass)

*35 *35 0 0 0

4 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW31 0 Automatic power on by RADF operation during the power save mode

*36 *36 1 1 1

1 Use of E-mail Permit Prohibit 0 0 0

2 Use of FTP Permit Prohibit 0 0 0

3 Use of BOX Permit Prohibit 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 8.5 x 14 is detected for F4 size

F4 8.5 x 14 0 0 0

DIPSW32 0 Mode intended for auto-matic deletion of document

Except files received by PC-Fax

Delete all 0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 Job list name switch file name user name 0 0 0


Japan Inch Metric

1-19 1

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


1

DIPSW33 0 Number of punch hole *39 *39 0 0 0

1 0 0 0

2 0 0 0

3 0 0 0

4 0 0 0

5 0 0 0

6 0 0 0

7 0 0 0

DIPSW40 0 Use of SNMP Permit Prohibit 0 0 0

1 — — — 1 1 1

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0


Japan Inch Metric

1-20

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


*1 FS-112 stapling upper limit

*2 Toner level detection (toner supply display)After the TLD (Toner level sensor) detects theno toner condition for more than a specifiedperiod of time, this sets a timing for displayingthe message “Please supply toner”.

*3 Condition for stopping copying after toner sup-ply displayAfter displaying a message set in DIPSW4-0/-1, the count up to which the copy is prohibitedis set.

*5 SW for decreased toner consumptionDecreasing the developing bias, charging gridpotential by 50V (20 step) in this setting allowsthe consumption of toner to be reduced.Increasing the potential by 50V (20 step)allows the image density to increase a little.

*6 Timing for the polygon motor to stop/start alow speed rotationWhen the setting of the polygon motor ismade for stopping or a low speed rotation, themotor is shifted into a low speed rotation orstopping after the elapse of time specified bythis DIPSW. The elapsed time starts either atone of the following:

• When the warm-up is completed.• When the final operation of the operation keys

(except the start key)/RADF/tray while in idling.• When the output of a copy or print job is com-

pleted.

Mode 1-4 1-350 sheets 0 045 sheets 0 140 sheets 1 035 sheets 1 1

Mode 4-1 4-00 effective copies 0 0100 effective copies 0 1200 effective copies 1 0500 effective copies 1 1

Mode 4-3 4-2100 effective copies 0 0400 effective copies 0 1700 effective copies 1 01000 effective copies 1 1

Mode 5-6 5-5No adjustment 0 0Toner consumption increased (image den-sity increased)

0 1

Toner consumption decreased (image den-sity decreased )

1 0

No adjustment 1 1

Mode 6-5 6-415 seconds 0 030 seconds 0 160 seconds 1 0120 seconds 1 1

1-21 1

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


*7 Setting of the polygon motor for stopping orlow speed rotationIn order to reduce the sound of rotation of thepolygon motor while in idling, it is possible toswitch the rotation of the polygon motor eitherto a low speed rotation or stopping. The timingfor the switching is set based on *6 Timing forthe polygon motor to stop/start a low speedrotation. When the polygon motor is stoppedor rotating at low speed, the time required forthe first copy being made is increased.

*8 Out-of-original auto erasureWhen the AMS has been released due to theoriginal size being not the same as that of thetransfer paper size, this setting is used in theplaten copy to decide whether the out-of-origi-nal area is erased or not. This is the samefunction as the memory switch function in thekey operator mode. (Switching is not availablein the RADF copy mode.)

*9 Automatic re-starting after paper supply(excluding inch system)

*10 Automatic conversion of the APS detectedpaper size (8.5 x 11/A4)The paper size detected by the APS is auto-matically converted according to the standardshown below before being copied.

*11 Switching of non-standard size notice ofplaten APSA4 (Japan/Metric), 8.5 x 11 (inch)When the original size is detected as a non-standard size, the switching is made to decidea copying method: a copy is made forcibly intothe following size or it is made in the sizeselected as a non-standard size.When both the DIPSW 7-3 and 7-4 are 1, theDIPSW7-4 has preference over 7-3.

*12 Priority tray when APS is releasedThis setting sets the tray selection used whenAPS is set OFF from key-operator mode.

Mode 6-7 6-6No preliminary rotation (high speed)

0 0

Preliminary rotation (low speed)

0 1

Stopping 1 0

Mode 7-0Out-of-original auto erasure 0Out-of-original erasure only while in APS/AMS

1

Mode 7-1Re-starting by turning on the START button

0

Re-starting by setting the tray (auto-matic)

1

Mode 7-2No automatic conversion 0A4 → 8.5 x 11 (Inch)8.5 x 11 → A4 (Japan, Metric)

1

Mode 7-3Copied in the size selected 0Copied forcibly as A4 (Japan, Metric) /8.5 x 11 (Inch)

1

Mode 7-4Copied in the size selected 0Copied forcibly as B6 (Japan)/A5 (Metric)/5.5 x 8.5 (Inch)

1

Mode 8-6 8-5 8-4No priority 0 0 0Main-body upper tray 0 0 1Main-body lower tray 0 1 0DB upper tray 0 1 1DB lower tray 1 0 0

1-22

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


*13 Copy quantity limit

*14 Switching of message

*15 Summer time setting

*16 Setting of the number of copies until the copy-ing operation is prohibited when PM isattainedIf the setting of the copy prohibition whenDIPSW8-2 reaches PM is “1”, the copyingoperation is stopped after the following PMcount is reached.

*17 Judging level in the out-of-original auto era-sure modeThis setting is for the application function ofthe out-of-original auto erasure mode. Whenthe out-of-original auto erasure is set to “auto-matic” in the key operator mode, a thresholdvalue is set for detection of the original area.

*18 Operation if stapling is not possibleThe positioning of staples is made against theimage of an original. Since stapling isrestricted only to the front or rear of the lead-ing edge (the main body side of the paperexited) of the transfer paper, or to both ofthese two positions, stapling may be some-times unavailable (when stapling is notallowed) depending on the position specified.This SW is used to set the operation whenstapling is not allowed.

*19 Operation when one position stapling is notavailable

Mode 9-3 9-2 9-1 9-0No limit 0 0 0 01 sheet 0 0 0 13 sheets 0 0 1 05 sheets 0 0 1 19 sheets 0 1 0 010 sheets 0 1 0 120 sheets 0 1 1 030 sheets 0 1 1 150 sheets 1 0 0 099 sheets 1 0 0 1

Mode 9-7 9-6Please insert key counter

0 0

Please insert copy card 0 1Please insert coin 1 0

Mode 10-3 10-2 10-1 10-00 minute 0 0 0 030 minutes 0 0 1 160 minutes 0 1 1 090 minutes 1 0 0 1120 minutes 1 1 0 0150 minutes 1 1 1 1

Mode 12-5 12-4 12-31000 copies 0 0 02000 copies 0 0 13000 copies 0 1 04000 copies 0 1 15000 copies 1 0 0

Mode 13-7 13-6Thick original 0 0Normal original 0 1Corresponding to hybrid lights

1 0

— 1 1

Mode 14-1 14-0Auto cancel 0 0Auto switching to 1-position stapling

0 1

Inhibit 1 0Forced 2-position sta-pling mode operation

1 1

Mode 14-5 14-4Auto cancel 0 0Auto cancel 0 1Inhibit 1 0Forced 1-position sta-pling mode operation

1 1

1-23

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


*20 Operation when two position stapling is notavailable

*21 Fixing temperature at low power modeSet the fixing temperature while in the lowpower mode.

*22 Dot diameter adjustment controlIn this setting, the SW is used to change thetiming for the dot diameter adjustment.

*23 F4 size setting

*24 Job interruption/termination operation whenthe key counter is being drawn outThis is to set the operation of the copier whenoutputting a print job.The details of the operation can be changedby the combination of this setting and theDIPSW1:0 setting.

*25 Switching of the count-up function

*26 Automatic feed of non-standard size originalsin the platen auto start modeThe setting of the automatic selection of auto-start is available for the memory switch settingin the key operator mode. When this setting isin the following condition, a setting can bemade to decide if the paper is automaticallyfed from the by-pass tray.

• The setting of the automatic selection of auto-start is on with the original size (platen) detectedas non-standard.

Mode 14-7 14-6Auto cancel 0 0Auto cancel 0 1Inhibit 1 0Forced 2-position sta-pling mode operation

1 1

Mode 16-1 16-0155°C 0 0120°C 0 185°C 1 085°C 1 1

Mode 16-7 16-6The power is off for more than 8 hours with humidity over 60%

0 0

The power is off for more than 8 hours

0 1

At all times (Every time SW2 is turned on)

1 0

Non (not allowed to use)

1 1

Mode 17-2 17-1 17-08.5 x 13 0 0 08.25 x 13 0 0 18.125 x 13 0 1 08 x 13 0 1 18.5 x 13.5 1 0 0

Mode 21-4DIPSW1-0:0 Terminate by stopping paper feedDIPSW1-0:1 Clear jamming imme-diately

0

DIPSW1-0:0 Interrupt by stopping paper feedDIPSW1-0:1 Clear jamming imme-diately

1

Mode 21-6Normal operationCounting up for both the total counter and the key counter

0

• While in copying, both the total counter and the key counter count up

• In the printer/FAX mode, only the total counter counts up

1

Mode 22-1Auto start does not take place 0Auto start takes place when the by-pass tray is selected

1

1-24

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


*27 Printer paper size automatic conversionThe paper size specified by the print job isautomatically changed and output accordingto the following standard.

*29 Switching of the job stop with no process stopThe SW is used to decide if a process stop ismade at the breaks between continuous twoor more jobs reserved.

*30 Automatic copy reservation functionWhen this setting is “1”, the copy reservationscreen automatically appears after the end ofthe original read operation. Also, the job set-tings are the same as the settings for the pre-vious job.

*31 Density setting when the toner save functionis selected in the printer driver screenWhen “Toner saving mode” is on in the printerdriver, the print density is set in the rangeshown below.This setting is effective only for the PCL andPS versions.

*32 Selection of the transfer/separation output ofthe user paper (tray)This SW is used to set the transfer/separationoutput which is applicable when the specifiedpaper is selected in the “Paper type setting” inthe key operator mode.

Mode 24-2 24-3No conversion 0 0Inch → Metric 0 1Metric → Inch 1 0Non (not allowed to select)

1 1

Mode 24-7No process stop 0Process stop 1

Mode 27-0Do not use 0Use 1

Mode 27-7 27-6 27-5Standard 0 0 0-4 (Lighter) 0 0 1-3 0 1 0-2 0 1 1-1 1 0 0+1 1 0 1+2 1 1 0+3 (Darker) 1 1 1

Mode 29-2 29-1 29-0Plain paper (Japan) 0 0 0Plain paper (Inch) 0 0 1Plain paper (Metric) 0 1 0Thick paper 0 1 1Thin paper 1 0 0Recycled paper 1 0 1

1-25 1

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


*33 TSL control of user paper (tray)This SW is used to set the TSL control whichis applicable when the specified paper isselected in the “Paper type setting” in the keyoperator mode.When this SW is used to select the “Switchedaccording to the environment”, the switchingis made between “Normal control” and “All off”according to the environment.

• “Switched according to the environment” per-forms the TSL control according to the humiditydetected by the main body HUM1 (Humidity sen-sor).

*34 Selection of the transfer/separation output ofuser paper (by-pass feed)When selecting the by-pass tray on the copybasic screen, this SW is used to set the trans-fer/separation output which is applicable whenselecting the user specified paper for “Specialpaper setting” or the specified paper for“Paper type setting” in the key operator mode.

*35 TSL control of user paper (by-pass feed)When selecting the by-pass tray on the copybasic screen, this SW is used to set the TSLcontrol which is applicable when selecting theuser paper for “Special paper setting” or thespecified paper for “Paper type setting” in thekey operator mode.When this SW is used to select the “Switchedaccording to the environment”, the switchingis made between “Normal control” and “All off”according to the environment.

• “Switched according to the environment” per-forms the TSL controle according to the humiditydetected by the main body HUM1 (Humidity sen-sor).

*36 Automatic power on by the RADF operationduring the power save modeIn this setting, when the following operation ismade during the power save mode, the poweris automatically turned on.

• When the original is set in RADF (when thePS301 (No original sensor) is turned off).

• When the platen/RADF is opened (when PS15(APS timing sensor) is turned off).

• When the platen/RADF is closed (when PS15(APS timing sensor) is turned on).

Mode 29-4 29-3Normal control 0 0All off 0 1Switched according to the environment

1 0

Mode 30-2 30-1 30-0Plain paper (Japan) 0 0 0Plain paper (Inch) 0 0 1Plain paper (Metric) 0 1 0Thick paper 0 1 1Thin paper 1 0 0Recycled paper 1 0 1

Mode 30-4 30-3Normal control 0 0All off 0 1Switched according to the environment

1 0

Mode 31-0Disabled 0Enabled 1

1-26

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


*37 While rotating image during copying 1-2mode, leading edge of the 2nd side shifts 3 to4mm. This dipswitch is to adjust that shift.

*38 In platen copy mode, the paper exit directionis opposite between normal copy and memorycopy. Then the image position is not thesame.This amount of gaps is adjusted by thisdipswitch.

Mode 28-3 28-2 28-1 28-0+0mm 0 0 0 0+0.5mm 0 0 0 1-0.5mm 1 0 0 1+3.5mm 0 1 1 1-3.5mm 1 1 1 1

Mode 28-7 28-6 28-5 28-4+0mm 0 0 0 0+0.5mm 0 0 0 1-0.5mm 1 0 0 1-3.5mm 0 1 1 1+3.5mm 1 1 1 1

1-27 1

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


6.3 PM count setting

This function resets the PM count and sets the PMcycle. Care should be taken to reset the PM countproperly. The PM count/cycle menu includes the fol-lowing:[1. PM count resetting][2. PM cycle setting][3. Counter clear]

6.3.1 PM count reset

Select whether to reset the count in the PM countreset screen.

A. Procedure1. Enter the 25 Mode.2. “25 mode menu screen”

Press the [2. PM COUNT] key.3. “PM Count/Cycle Menu screen”

Press the [1. PM count reset] key.4. “PM Count Reset screen”

Press the [YES] key.The PM count is reset.Press the [NO] or [RETURN] key.The PM count is not reset and returns to the PMcount/cycle menu screen.

6.3.2 Entering PM count start date

When resetting the PM count, it is necessary toinput the start date, and the screen below willappear automatically.

A. Procedure1. “PM Count Starting Date Input screen”

Enter a PM count start date from the numerickeys.

2. Press the [SET] key to enter the data that hasbeen entered.

3. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the PMcount/cycle menu screen.

Note:• When pressing the [RETURN] key without press-

ing the [SET] key, the PM count start date is notchanged. It is necessary to reset the count againfor inputting the count.

6.3.3 Setting of PM cycle

Set PM Cycle as follows:


Press the [2. PM COUNT] key.3. “PM Count/Cycle Menu screen”

Press the [2. PM CYCLE Set] key.4. “PM Cycle set screen”

Enter PM cycle from the numeric keys. Enterupper 3-digit (hundred thousand, ten thousand,thousand) only.

5. Press the [SET] key to enter a PM cycle that hasbeen entered.

6. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the PMcount/cycle menu screen.

6.3.4 Counter clear

The counter must be cleared whenever the drum orfixing parts/unit is replaced.Select the [2. PM Count] and press the [3. Counterclear] key from the “25 mode menu screen” to dis-play the counter clear screen.Following menu options are available from thisscreen.• Drum related counter (Drum counter, Drum drive

counter).• Fixing related counter (Fixing web counter).


Press the [2. PM Count] key.3. “PM count/cycle setting screen”

Press the [3. Counter clear] key.4. “Counter clear screen”

Press the key corresponding to the item to becleared.

1-28

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


5. Message in the message display area will con-firm if you really want to clear the item. Pressthe [YES] key. When the item is cleared, the“Counter clear screen” will be restored.

6. When clearing another counter, repeat abovesteps 3 and 4.

7. Press the [RETURN] key twice to return to the“25 mode menu screen”.

6.4 Data collection

Reference:• The operation here is the same as [8. Counter

clear] of the “36 mode menu screen”.

This function enables viewing of the various datarecorded in the machine. Also, it is possible for thecollected data to be checked by KRDS and man-agement listing. The data collection menu includesthe following:• Count data collection• Area data collection start (Date count data)

A. Data that can be checked

Note:• When the DIPSW8-7 is set to 0, the checking of

the collected data is limited only to No. 1.

B. Checking method of the collected data(1) Procedure1. Enter the 25 Mode.2. “25 mode menu screen”

Press the [Data collection] key.3. “Data collection menu screen”

Press the [Count data] key.4. “Data collection screen”

Change the data number with the arrow key.Pressing [NEXT] key enables display of nextdata collection screen.

5. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the datacollection menu screen.

• The data is displayed at the line 2 in the mes-sage display area as “Data number (No.): Countvalue (00000000)”.

• Press and hold the arrow key to display the nextitems continuously.

Note:• In order to check the collected data 2 to 4, be

sure to make preparations given in “Collecteddata list” in advance.

No. Classification Pre-peration1 Copy count of each

paper size—

RADF paper pas-sage count

2 Count of JAM occur-rence by each point

Enter the 25 mode↓Select [1. Software SW]↓Set the address to 8-7:1 (Note)

3 Copy count of each mode

4 Count of SC occur-rence

1-29 1

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


C. Data collection details(1) Data collection 1a. Copy count by each size

b. Scanner and counting of the number of FAX scans

c. Count RADF original feed quantities

(2) Data collection 2a. Jam occurrence count by factor

Classification Size No. Paper size for destination KRDS (B1, B6, B7, B8)Japan Metric Inch

Copy count of each paper size

0 A3 A3 11 x 17 011 B4 B4 8.5 x 14 022 A4/A4R A4/A4R 8.5 x 11/8.5 x 11R 033 B5/B5R B5/B5R 5.5 x 8.5 044 A5 A5 — 055 B6 F4 — 066 8.5 x 14 — — 077 8.5 x 11/8.5 x 11R — A4/A4R 088 Metric Metric Inch 09

Special Special Special9 Postcard — — 0A

Maximum count number : 99,999,999

Classification Size No. Feed mode KRDS (BA)Count of the No. of scan image planes

10 Other than 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, A3 and B4 0111 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, A3 and B4 00


Classification Size No. Feed mode KRDS (F0)RADF paper passage count

15 ADF mode original feed counter 0016 RADF mode original feed counter 0117 ADF mixed original mode original feed counter 0718 RADF mixed original mode original feed counter 08


No. Jam Point KRDS (J0)00 10-0 By-pass 0001 11-0 Upper tray 0102 12-0 Lower tray 0203 13-0 DB upper tray 0304 14-0 DB lower tray 0405 16-1 Paper feed jam 0506 15-0 LT tray 0607 16-2 LT tray 0708 — — 0809 30-0 Conveyance jam 09

1-30

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


10 31-0 Conveyance jam 0A11 — — 0B12 — — 0C13 32-0 Fixing unit conveyance jam 0D14 — — 0E15 — — 0F16 75-10 IT-101 1017 75-11 1118 — — 1219 97-1 ADU conveyance jam 1320 97-2 1421 92-0 1522 75-12 IT-101 1623 75-13 1724 61-1 DF-318 1825 61-2 1926 — — 1A27 62-1 DF-318 1B28 62-2 1C29 62-3 1D30 62-4 1E31 62-5 1F32 — — 2033 63-1 DF-318 2134 63-2 2235 63-3 2336 63-4 2437 — — 2538 — — 2639 — — 2740 — — 2841 — — 2942 72-16 FS-112/113 2A43 72-17 2B44 72-18 FS-113 2C45 72-19 FS-112 2D46 72-21 FS-112/113 2E47 72-23 FS-112 2F48 72-81 FS-112/113 3049 72-82 FS-113 3150 72-83 3251 — — 33

:79 — — 4F80 — — 50

Maximum count number : 999,999

No. Jam Point KRDS (J0)

1-31

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


(3) Data collection 3a. Copy count of each mode

No. Contents KRDS (F1)00 Platen single side → single side 0001 — 0102 RADF double side → single side 0203 RADF double side → double side 0304 RADF single side → single side 0405 RADF single side → double side 0506 Finisher (Staple mode) 0607 Finisher (Sort mode) 0708 Finisher (Group mode) 0809 Finisher (Number of stapling) 0910 Life-size 0A11 Fixed ratio E3(1.41/2.00) 0B12 Fixed ratio E2(1.22/1.55) 0C13 Fixed ratio E1(1.15/1.29) 0D14 Fixed ratio R1(0.86/0.77) 0E15 Fixed ratio R2(0.82/0.65) 0F16 Fixed ratio R3(0.71/0.50) 1017 Arbitrary magnification 1118 Zoom 1219 Maximum zoom 1320 Minimum zoom 1421 AMS mode 1522 APS mode 1623 AE mode 1724 Interrupt mode 1825 By-pass feed mode 1926 Book copy mode 1A27 Frame erase mode 1B28 Fold erase mode 1C29 Image shift mode 1D30 Reduction image shift mode 1E31 — 1F32 — 2033 Number of paper feed quantities

at intersheet mode21

34 — 2235 Number of feed in the OHP mode

(blank paper interleave)23

36 Number of paper feed quantities at mixed original mode

24

37 Access number of the JOB memory call mode (Number of pressing the ∗ button)

25

38 Number of times the auto low power mode is used

26

39 Number of starting copy with copy quantity is set to 1

27

40 Number of starting copy with copy quantity is set between 2 and 5

28

41 Number of starting copy with copy quantity is set between 6 and 10

29

42 Number of starting copy with copy quantity is set to 11 or above

2A

43 Number of starting copy in inter-sheet mode

2B

44 — 2C45 Photo mode 2D46 — 2E47 Verti./Horiz. zoom mode 2F48 Memory copy mode 3049 Confirmation copy mode 3150 Text/Photo mode 3251 Text mode 3352 Arbitrary density mode 3453 Number of feed in the OHP mode

(copy interleave)35

54 — 3655 — 3756 Page insertion mode 3857 Chapter division mode 3958 2 in 1, 4 in 1, 8 in 1 mode 3A59 Repeat mode 3B60 B/W reverse mode 3C61 Non-image area erase mode 3D62 Increase contrast mode 3E63 Original auto layout copy 3F64 — 4065 Number of copies in rotation 4166 Copy quantity of paper feed from tray 1 4267 Copy quantity of paper feed from tray 2 4368 Copy quantity of paper feed from tray 3 4469 Copy quantity of paper feed from tray 4 4570 — 4671 — 4772 Finisher, Number of stapling (front) 4873 Finisher, Number of stapling (rear) 4974 Booklet mode copying count 4A75 OHP mode (without doubled

sheet) copying count4B

76 Z-fold mode copying count 4C

No. Contents KRDS (F1)

1-32

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


(4) Data collection 4a. Count number of SC occurrence

77 Copy quantity in the non-stan-dard size mode

4D

78 Stamping/overlay mode copying count 4E79 Image head correction mode

copying count4F

80 Number of copies in the punch mode 5081 — 5182 Number of copies in the thick

paper 1 copy mode52

83 Number of copies in the thick paper 2 copy mode

53

84 Number of copies in the plain paper mode

54

85 Number of copies in the thin paper mode

55

86 Number of copies in the recycled paper mode

56

87 Number of copies in the user specified paper mode

57


No. Error code (decimal number)

Classification KRDS

Main code Sub code001 10-1 Communication error E0 00002 10-2 01003 — — 02004 18-1 Paper feed tray error 03005 18-2 04006 18-3 05007 18-4 06008 26-1 L detection error 07009 28-1 High voltage power

error08

010 28-2 09011 28-3 0A012 34-1 High fixing temperature

abnormality0B

013 34-2 0C014 35-1 Low fixing tempera-

ture abnormality0D

015 35-2 0E016 35-3 0F017 35-4 10018 35-5 11

No. Contents KRDS (F1)

019 35-6 Low fixing tempera-ture abnormality

E0 12020 35-7 13021 35-8 14022 35-9 15023 35-10 16024 36-1 Fixing sensor error 17025 36-2 18026 36-3 19027 36-4 1A028 40-1 Scanning system

error1B

029 40-9 1C030 41-1 1D031 46-1 Image processing

system error1E

032 46-8 1F033 46-10 20034 46-11 21035 — — 22036 49-4 Image processing

system error23

037 49-6 24038 51-4 Motor speed error 25039 51-5 26040 51-6 27041 52-1 Fan lock error 28042 52-2 29043 E56-1 Image control

communication errorE1 00

044 E56-2 01045 E56-3 02046 E56-4 03047 E56-5 04048 E56-6 Operation control

section system error05

049 E56-7 06050 E56-8 07051 E56-9 08052 E56-10 09053 — — E0 2A054 60-1 RADF error 2B055 60-9 2C056 60-11 2D057 67-3 2E058 70-1 Finisher error 2F059 70-9 30060 70-11 31061 77-2 32062 77-3 33


Classification KRDS

Main code Sub code

1-33 1

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


1

063 77-5 Finisher error E0 34064 77-6 35065 77-11 36066 77-16 37067 80-1 Parameter memory

board abnormality38

068 80-2 39069 80-3 3A070 80-4 3B071 80-5 3C072 81-1 Flash ROM error 3D073 81-2 3E074 81-3 3F075 E88-1 Image processing

system errorE1 0A

076 E89-1 System control board communication error

0B077 E89-2 0C078 E89-3 0D079 E89-4 0E080 E89-5 0F081 E89-6 10082 E87-1 Print controller error 11083 52-5 Fan lock error E0 40084 86-02 Fax board error 41085 E86-03 42086 E86-04 E1 12087 86-06 Fax error (System

control board side)E0 43

088 E86-88 E1 13089 E86-89 14090 — — 15091 E86-91 Fax error (System

control board side)16

092 — — 17093 E86-20 Fax error (Fax board side) 18094 22-1 Machine internal

temperatureE0 44

095 23-1 Drum periphery 45096 26-2 L detection 46097 26-3 47098 28-4 — 48099 43-1 Scanning system error 49100 52-3 Fan lock error 4A101 36-4 Broken fixing sensor 4B102 52-6 Fan lock error 4C103 87-2 Print controller error 4D


Classification KRDS

Main code Sub code104 87-3 Print controller error E0 4E105 — — 4F106 52-4 Fan lock error 50107 86-7 Fax board error 51108 86-8 52109 18-5 Paper feed tray error 53110 26-4 High voltage power error 54111 51-2 Motor speed error 55112 52-7 Fan lock error 56113 52-8 57114 E56-12 System control board

communication errorE1 19

115 E56-13 1A116 77-1 Finisher error E0 58117 77-4 59118 77-12 5A119 77-17 5B120 77-54 5C121 77-55 5D122 85-1 Network system

abnormality5E

123 85-2 5F124 85-3 60125 E85-11 E1 1B126 E85-12 1C127 E85-13 1D128 E85-14 1E129 E85-15 1F130 E85-16 20131 E85-17 21132 E85-18 22133 E85-20 23134 E85-21 24135 E85-22 25136 E85-23 26137 52-9 Fan lock error E0 61138 81-4 Flash ROM error 62139 82-1 Document manager error 63140 82-2 64141 E82-10 E1 27142 E89-80 CPU hang up-1143 E89-81 CPU hang up-2

148 — —149 — —

Maximum count number : 9,999


Classification KRDS

Main code Sub code

1-34

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


D. Starting periodic date collectionReset the periodic data from the setting peri-odic collection start date. Make a date that thisoperation is performed as a new periodic col-lection start date.The periodic data can be checked with theKRDS and management list.

(1) Procedure1. Enter the 25 mode.2. “25 mode menu screen”

Press the [3. Collecting data] key.3. “Data collection menu screen”

Press the [2. Starting periodic data collection]key.

4. “Starting periodic data collection screen”Press the [YES] key to start the periodic datacollection.Press the [NO] or [RETURN] key, then data col-lection start date is not reset and returns to thedata colleciton menu screen.

6.5 Copy count for each part tobe replaced

Perform the copy count display, count clear, limitvalue setting and arbitrarily parts to be replaced set-ting to the data of the parts to be replaced (fixed/arbitrarily).Each count value can be check with the manage-ment list of 36 Mode and the KRDS. The followingare included in the part counter menu:• Copy Count for each fixed replacement part• Copy Count for each arbitrarily replacement part

6.5.1 Copy count by parts to be replaced (fixed)

Set the parts name of the fixed parts to be replaced(fixed), parts No. and copy count display, and countreset.


Press the [4. Parts counter] key.3. “Parts counter menu screen”

Press the [1. Count of parts (Fixed)] key.4. “Copy count screen by parts to be replaced

(fixed)”Press the arrow keys to select the data.

5. Press the [Count reset] key.6. “Count reset screen by parts to be replaced

(fixed)”Press the [YES] key to clear the copy count.Press the [NO] or [RETURN] key, then the copycount is not reset and returns to the copy countscreen by parts to be replaced.

1-35

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


1

B. List of parts to be replaced (fixed)

No. Unit Parts name KRDS (Z1)

01 DC (includ-ing charging corona unit)

Drum 00

02 Cleaning blade assembly

01

03 Drum unit 0204 Transfer/

separation corona

Transfer/separation corona unit

03

05 Developing unit Developer 0406 Developing unit 0507 Main body Ozone filter 0640 Suction filter /A 2741 Filter cover assembly 2808 Main body

paper feed unit

(Tray 1) Feed rubber 0709 (Tray 1) Double feed

prevention rubber /U08

10 (Tray 1) Double feed prevention rubber /L

09

11 (Tray 2) Feed rubber 0A12 (Tray 2) Double feed

prevention rubber /U0B


0C

14 DB-211/411 (Tray 3) Feed rubber 0D15 (Tray 3) Double feed

prevention rubber /U0E


0F

17 DB-211 (Tray 4) Feed rubber 1018 (Tray 4) Double feed

prevention rubber /U11


12

20 By-pass feed unit

By-pass feed reverse roller

13

21 By-pass feed pick up roller

14

22 By-pass feed convey-ance roller

15

23 Fixing unit Fixing heat roller 1624 Fixing pressure roller 1725 Fixing web 1826 Heat insulating sleeve /A 1927 Heat insulating sleeve /B 1A28 Fixing idling gear /B 1B29 — 1C30 Fixing claw 1D31 Fixing roller holder /U 1E32 Fixing roller holder /L 1F33 Fixing sensor 2034 Fuse mounting plate

assembly21

35 Fixing heater lamp /1 2236 Fixing heater lamp /2 2337 DF-318 Paper feed roller /A 2438 Double feed preven-

tion roller /A assembly25

45 Paper feed roller /B 2C39 FS-112 Paper exit roller /A 2642 LT-203 Feed rubber 2943 Double feed preven-

tion rubber /U2A

44 Double feed preven-tion rubber /L

2B

No. Unit Parts name KRDS (Z1)

1-36

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


6.5.2 Copy count by parts to be replaced(Named; arbitrarily)

Set the limit value for the parts to be replaced, partsNo., parts name setting, copy count display andcount reset.

A. Copy count display and count reset by partsto be replaced

(1) Procedure1. Enter the 25 Mode.2. “25 mode menu screen”

Press the [4. Parts counter ] key.3. “Parts counter menu screen”

Press the [2. Count of parts (Named)] key.4. “Copy count screen by parts to be replaced

(named)”Press the arrow key to select the data to be setor changed.

5. The following items can be set below:• “COUNT RESET” : To clear the copy count.• “LIMIT SET” : To enter the limit value (6-digit).• “P/N SET” : To enter the parts number (9-digit).• “Parts name” : To enter the parts name.6. Press the [RETURN] key, then return to the

“Copy screen by parts to be replaced”.

B. List of parts to be replaced (arbitrarily)

No. Count timing KRDS (G0)

00 When copy count (at the paper exit is completed) 0001 When copy count (at the paper exit is completed) 0102 When copy count (at the paper exit is completed) 0203 When copy count (at the paper exit is completed) 0304 When copy count (at the paper exit is completed) 0405 When copy count (at the paper exit is completed) 0506 When copy count (at the paper exit is completed) 0607 When copy count (at the paper exit is completed) 0708 When copy count (at the paper exit is completed) 0809 When copy count (at the paper exit is completed) 0910 When copy count (at the paper exit is completed) 0A11 When copy count (at the paper exit is completed) 0B12 When copy count (at the paper exit is completed) 0C13 When copy count (at the paper exit is completed) 0D14 When copy count (at the paper exit is completed) 0E15 When copy count (at the paper exit is completed) 0F16 When copy count (at the paper exit is completed) 1017 When copy count (at the paper exit is completed) 1118 When copy count (at the paper exit is completed) 1219 When paper is fed from LT-203 1320 When paper is fed from by-pass tray 1421 When paper is fed from tray 1 1522 When paper is fed from tray 2 1623 When paper is fed from tray 3 1724 When paper is fed from tray 4 1825 When paper is fed from ADU 1926 When paper is exited from main body 1A27 When RADF is read (1 count each for front and back) 1B28 When RADF is read (1 count each for front and back) 1C29 When RADF is read (1 count each for front and back) 1D

1-37

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


C. Count resetting method(1) Procedure1. Enter the 25 Mode.2. “25 mode menu screen”



(named)”Press the arrow keys to select the data.

5. Press the [COUNT RESET] key.6. “Count reset screen by parts to be replaced

(named)”Press the [YES] key to clear the copy count thathas been selected.Press the [NO] or [RETURN] key, then the copycount is not reset and returns to the “Copy countscreen by parts to be replaced (named)”.

D. Count limit setting methodEnter the new limit value from the numeric keyson the screen.





5. Press the [LIMIT SET] key.6. “Copy count limit setting screen by parts to be

replaced (named)”Enter new value using the numeric keys.

7. Press the [SET] key to enter the limit value thathas been entered.

8. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the copycount screen by parts to be replaced (named).


ing the [SET] key, the setting is complete withoutchanging a new limit value and returns to thecopy count screen by parts to be replaced(Named).

Reference:• The right side of the limit value will be marked “∗”

if the copy count exceeds its limit value.

E. Parts No. settingEnter the new parts No. (9-digit) from thenumeric keys and alphabet keys on the screen.





5. Press the [P/N SET] key.6. “Part No. setting screen by parts to be replaced

(named)”Enter new parts No. using the numeric andalphabet keys.

7. Press the [SET] key to enter the limit value thathas been entered.

8. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the copycount screen by parts to be replaced (named).


ing the [SET] key, the setting is complete withoutchanging a new parts No. and returns to the copycount screen by parts to be replaced (Named).

1-38

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


F. Parts name settingEnter the new parts name from the keys on thescreen.There are three screen in the input screen andare changed with the arrow key:

• Alphabet (a capital letter), numeric number• Alphabet (a small letter), numeric number• Symbol, numeric number

The key arrangement can be changed by press-ing the [Keyboard] key in the alphanumeric(uppercase letter /lowercase letter), symbol anddata input screen.





5. Press the [P/N SET] key.6. “Parts name setting screen by parts to be

replaced (named)”Enter new parts name using the keys on thescreen.

7. Press the [OK] key to enter the parts name thathas been entered and return to the copy countscreen by parts to be replaced (Named).

Note:• When pressing the [CANCEL] key without press-

ing the [OK] key, the setting is completed withoutsetting a parts name and returns to the copycount screen by parts to be replaced (Named).

6.6 Password setting

The following passwords are set.• Key operator password (4 digits): A password

used to enter the key operator mode.• User account (EKC) master key code (8 digits):

An EKC master key code that is required whenentering various EKC setting modes.

• Weekly timer password (4 digits): A weekly timerpassword that is required when entering variousweekly timer setting modes.

A. Procedure1. Enter the 25 Mode.2. Press the [5. Password setting] key.3. “Password setting menu screen”

Press the key of an item that you want to set.• [Key Operator Password (4 digits)]• [User account (EKC) master key code (8 digits)]• [Weekly timer Password (4 digits)]4. Input a new password through the numeric keys

and press the [SET] key to update the pass-word. When the following keys are set for the pass-word, each mode can be used without a pass-word.

• “0000”: Key Operator Password/Weekly timerPassword

• “00000000”: User account (EKC) master keycode

5. Repeat the procedures 3 and 4 to set pass-words for other items.

6. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the pass-word setting menu screen.


ing the [SET] key, the setting is complete. How-ever the new password will not be entered andthe password setting menu screen will return.

1-39

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


6.7 Setting phone number of theservice center

This function displays the telephone and fax num-bers (Max. 21 digits) of the service center which isindicated on the screen if a service call is required.This function is not related to KRDS functions. It isdesigned only for indicating the data on the screen.


Press the [6. Service TEL No.] key.3. “Service center number setting screen”

Press either of the [TEL] or [FAX] key which youwant to set.

4. Input the telephone number or fax numberthrough the numeric keys and press the [SET]key to update the telephone number or fax num-ber.

5. When setting both the telephone number andthe fax number, repeat the procedures 3 and 4above.



ing the [SET] key, the setting is complete. How-ever the new phone number will not be enteredand the “25 mode menu screen” will return.

6.8 Setting the serial number/thedestination

6.8.1 Setting the serial number

This function is used to display, set and change theserial number of the main body and optional units.The serial numbers can be read from KRDS.


Press the [7. Serial number] key.3. “Serial number setting menu screen”

From among the keys, press the key of an itemyou want to change.

4. “Serial number setting screen”Enter the 9-digit serial number from the alpha-bet and numeric keys on the screen and thenpress the [SET] key to enter the number thathas been entered.

Reference:• Characters input are entered at the least signifi-

cant digit and displayed while shifting from right toleft.

5. Repeat the procedures 3 and 4 to set the serialnumbers of other items.

6. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “Serialnumber setting menu screen”.


ing the [SET] key, the setting is complete. How-ever the new serial number will not be enteredand the “Serial number setting menu screen” willreturn.

1-40

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


6.8.2 Setting the destination

To change the destination setting, press the [Desti-nation] key on the serial-number setup menu. Theprocedure is as follows.


Press the [7. Serial No.] key.3. “Serial number setting screen”

Press the [Destination] key.4. “Destination setting screen”

Use the arrow key to select the destination.5. Press the [OK] key to register the setting.

Note:• If you press [CANCEL] key, the copier will retain

the previous destination setting and return you tothe “Serial number setting screen”.


Destination codes

6.9 Displaying the ROM version

Display ROM version mounted to the machine.


Press the [ROM version] key.3. “ROM version display screen”• System control• Image control• Panel control• Optical control• Various options

If any option is not installed, its relevant positionremains blank.


6.10 KRDS setting

See the “Manual for KRDS”.

6.11 ISW setting

See the chapter “ISW”.

6.12 Root counter display

The root counter (total counter can be checked in25 mode on the root counter display.


Press the [11. Root counter] key.3. “Root counter display screen”

Values of the root counter (total counter) are dis-played.

4. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “25mode screen”.

Code Destination Code DestinationJP Japan IE IrelandCA Canada FI FinlandUS U.S.A SE SwedenKR Korea NO NorwaySG Singapore AT AustriaMY Malaysia BE BelgiumCN China NL NetherlandsSA Saudi Arabia CH SwitzerlandTW Taiwan FR FranceZA South Africa GB Great BritainPL Poland DE GermanPT Portugal EU EuropeES Spain NZ New ZealandIT Italy AU AustraliaDK Denmark

1-41

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


6.13 Setting date

Set the total count start day.


Press the [12.Setting date] key.3. “Setting date screen”

Using the numeric keys, enter the year, monthand day in that sequence.

4. Press the [OK] key to return to the “25 modescreen”.

Note:• Ends when the [CANCEL] key is pressed without

amending the entered date, and returns to the “25mode menu screen”.

6.14 Tray size setting

This setting is made when changing the paper sizeof the option tray (LT-203). The paper size that canbe selected is only A4 and 8.5 x 11.

A. Procedure1. Enter the 25 mode.2. “25 mode menu screen”

Press the [13. Tray size setting] key.3. “Tray size setting screen”

Press the arrow key to change the paper size ofthe LT-203.


1-42

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


7. 36 MODE

7.1 Setting method

A special operating mode called “36 Mode” hasbeen provided with this machine. This modeenables adjustment of the various parts.

A. Procedure1. Turn the SW2 (sub power switch) OFF when the

SW1 (main power switch) remains ON.2. Turn the SW2 ON while pressing 3 and 6 of the

copy quantity setting buttons. 36 mode menuscreen will appear on the LCD. At this time, nor-mal copy operation is not possible.

3. Press the desired item key on the LCD screen.Each setting screen will appear.

4. Enter data in each setting screen.5. Press the [RETURN] key to check the data that

has been entered.6. Turn the SW2 OFF to cancel the 36 mode.7. New data will be effective after restarting.

Note:• If FNS is not installed, the [FNS adj.] key is netted

and neither key can be selected.

7.2 Process adjustment

Adjust the L detection, various high voltages, devel-oper toner density, dot diameter, and the laser off-set.

A. Procedure1. Select [1. Process adjustment] in the 36 mode

menu screen and display the “Process adjust-ment menu screen”.

2. The following items are shown on the “Processadjustment menu screen”.

• Charging voltage value adjustment• Transfer current adjustment• Separation (AC) voltage adjustment• Separation (DC) voltage value adjustment• Charging grid voltage adjustment• Developing bias adjustment• L detection adjustment• Automatic toner supply

• Toner density adjustment• Dot diameter adjustment• LD1 offset adjustment• LD2 offset adjustment• LD1 bias adjustment• LD2 bias adjustment3. Press the arrow key until the item you want to

adjust appears. The adjustment screen of theselected item is displayed.

4. Press the [Preceding screen] of each processadjustment screen to return to “Process adjust-ment menu screen”.

(1) Process adjustment—Charging voltage valueadjustment

• Charging voltage value adjustment is inhibited inthe field.

(2) Process adjustment—Transfer current adjust-ment

• Transfer current adjustment is inhibited in thefield.

(3) Process adjustment—Separation (AC) voltageadjustment

• Separation (AC) voltage adjustment is inhibitedin the field.

(4) Process adjustment—Separation (DC) voltagevalue adjustment

• Separation (DC) voltage value adjustment isinhibited in the field.

(5) Process adjustment—Charging grid voltageadjustment

• Charging grid voltage adjustment is inhibited inthe field.

(6) Process adjustment—Developing bias adjust-ment

• Developing bias adjustment is inhibited in thefield.

(7) Process adjustment—L detection adjustment• See “L detection adjustment”.

(8) Process adjustment—Automatic toner supply• Normally carried out automatically, and the pro-

cess adjustment - automatic toner supply is notmade in the field.

(9) Process adjustment—Toner density adjustment• See “Toner density adjustment”.

(10) Process adjustment—Dot diameter adjustment• See “Dot diameter adjustment”.

1-43

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


(11) Process adjustment—LD1 offset adjustment• See “LD1 offset adjustment”.

(12)Process adjustment—LD2 offset adjustment• See “LD2 offset adjustment”.

(13)Process adjustment—LD1 bias adjustment• The LD1 bias adjustment is not made in the field.

(14)Process adjustment—LD2 bias adjustment• The LD2 bias adjustment is not made in the field.

7.3 L detection adjustment

This adjustment be made immediately after replace-ment of the developer (before any copies are madewith the new developer). Developing counter isautomatically reset.

Note:• After replacing the developer, do not make copies

until you have performed L detection adjustment.


Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.3. “Process adjustment screen”

Press the arrow key until the “L detection adjust-ment value”. appears in the message displayarea.

4. “L detection adjustment screen”Press the [START] key, then confirm that [OK] isdisplayed at “Result” and the L detection datavalue.


Note:• If an OK indication does not appear after the

developer has been agitated, it means that an Ldetection adjustment error has occurred. In thiscase, an error code will appear in the “Result” dis-play area. For the meaning of error codes, refer tothe “L detection error code list” of “List of errorcodes”.

7.4 Toner density adjustment

The developer toner density can be increased ordecreased by making this adjustment.Major cases in which this adjustment is used:• When the image fogging has occurred due to the

increased density in the developer toner density.(In this case, reduce the toner density.)Preparation: The drum cartridge must be set inadvance.


Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.3. Press the arrow key repeatedly until the “Toner

density adjustment” is displayed in the messagecolumn.

4. “Toner density adjustment screen”Select the set value [-2] to [+2], and press the[START] key.

• Set value: -2 (toner density decreased) to +2(toner density increased)

• When [Current set value] → [New set value] =the same, return the toner density to the normallevel.

• When [Current set value] → [New set value] = +(plus), increase the transient level of the tonerdensity.

• When [Current set value] → [New set value] = -(minus), decrease the transient level of the tonerdensity.According to the value set, the toner density isautomatically adjusted. When the adjustment isterminated in about 250 seconds.


Note:• When an error code is displayed while in the

toner density adjustment, conduct the toner den-sity adjustment again after checking the expecteddefective parts on the error code list.F26-3: TDS (Toner density sensor output abnor-mality)

1-44

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


7.5 Dot diameter adjustment

The MPC value can be corrected to change theimage density (dot diameter) by entering a setting.(Common to copier/printer/fax)Major cases in which this adjustment is used:• When you want to change the image density.• When changing the write unit or TCSB (toner

control sensor board), or when cleaning thedust-proof glass.

Preparation: The drum cartridge must be set inadvance.


Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.3. Press the arrow key repeatedly until the “Dot

diameter adjustment” is displayed in the mes-sage column.

4. “Dot diameter adjustment screen”Select the set value [-3] to [+3], and press the[START] key.According to the value set, the dot diameter isautomatically adjusted.

• Set value: -3 (toward the lighter) to +3 (towardthe darker)


Note:• When the adjustment is made toward the darker,

the dot diameter becomes thick and the tonerconsumption is increased.

7.6 LD1 offset adjustment

The write position of the LD1 laser is adjusted.This adjustment must be made when replacing thewrite unit, drum and/or the developer.Preparation: The drum cartridge must be set inadvance. The developing unit must be filled withdeveloper. The L detection adjustment, toner den-sity adjustment and the dot diameter adjustmentmust be completed.


Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.3. Press the arrow key repeatedly until the “LD1

offset adjustment” is displayed in the messagecolumn.

4. “LD1 offset adjustment screen”Press the [COPY] key.

5. Select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press theSTART button to print the test pattern.

6. Check the test pattern.Specification: Check to see if the LD1 laser out-put patterns are uniform as shown in the draw-ing below and the starting points of the lowdensity section are matched between the refer-ence lines.

[1] Reference line

LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2

[1]

1-45 1

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


1

7. If it is not within specification, press the # buttonwhile holding down the ∗ button.

8. “LD1 offset adjustment screen”Input the offset value through the numeric keysand press the [SET] key.

• Setting range: -128 ~ +1279. Repeat the procedures 4 to 7 until the specified

value is attained.10. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “36

mode menu screen”.

7.7 LD2 offset adjustment

The write position of the LD2 laser is adjusted.This adjustment must be made when replacing thewrite unit, drum and the developer.Preparation: The drum cartridge must be set inadvance. The developing unit must be filled withdeveloper. The L detection adjustment, toner den-sity adjustment, dot diameter adjustment and theLD1 offset adjustment must be completed.


Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.3. Press the [Next item] key repeatedly until the

“LD2 offset adjustment” is displayed in the mes-sage column.

4. “LD2 offset adjustment screen”Press the [COPY] key.

5. Select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press theSTART button to print the test pattern.

6. Check the test patterns.Specification: Check to see if the LD2 laser out-put patterns are uniform as shown in the draw-ing below and the starting points of the lowdensity section are matched between the refer-ence lines.


8. “LD2 offset adjustment screen”Enter the offset value through the numeric keysand press the [SET] key.

• Setting range: -128 ~ +1279. Repeat the procedures 4 to 7 until the specified

value is attained.10. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “36

mode menu screen”.

[1] Reference line

LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2

[1]

1-46

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


7.8 Timing adjustment

This function adjusts each timing. When timingadjustment is performed, use A3 or 11 x 17 sizepaper.

A. Procedure1. Select [2. Timing adj.] in the “36 mode menu

screen”.The “Timing adjustment menu screen” willappear.

• The following items are included in the timingadjustment.“1 Vertical/horizontal magnification adjustment”“2 Restart timing adjustment”“3 Paper feed loop amount adjustment”“4 Leading edge original erasure amount adjust-ment”“5 Centering adjustment”“6 Image read point adjustment”“7 Restoring standard data”

2. Press the item key to be adjusted. The selectedsetting screen will appear.

3. Press the [RETURN] key in each of the timingadjustment screens to return to the “Timingadjustment menu screen”.

7.8.1 Vertical/Horizontal magnification adjust-ment

The vertical and horizontal magnifications of theprinter system and the copy system are adjusted.

A. Procedure1. Select [2. Timing adj.] in the “36 mode menu

screen”.The “Timing adjustment menu screen” willappear.

2. Select the [1. Drum clock adj.] on the “Timingadjustment menu screen”. The “Drum clock adjustment (vertical/horizontalmagnification adjustment)” will appear.

3. This adjustment has the following items. Thesecan be selected by pressing the arrow key:

• Vertical magnification adjustment : Printer• Vertical magnification adjustment : Printer 2

• Vertical magnification adjustment : Platen• Horizontal magnification adjustment : Platen• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (single

side, 50%)• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (single



side, 400%)• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (dou-

ble side, 50%)• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (dou-



ble side, 400%)4. Enter data from the numeric keys on the screen,

then press the [SET] key to enter the data thathave been entered.

5. Press the [COPY] key to return to the basicscreen, then make a test copy.

6. Press the # button while pressing the ∗ button toreturn to the Vertical/Horizontal magnificationadjustment screen.

7. Press the [RETURN] key in the “Vertical andhorizontal magnification adjustment screen” toreturn to the “Timing adjustment menu screen”.

(1) Printer vertical magnification adjustmentWith the amount of the paper feed loopadjusted properly between the registrationroller and the fixing roller, the transfer slippagein the position about 20mm from the trailingedge of the transfer paper is prevented.

a. Procedure1. Enter the 36 mode.2. “36 mode menu screen”

Press the [2. Timing adj.] key.3. “Timing adjustment menu screen”

Press the [1. Drum clock adj.] key.4. “Timing adjustment screen”

Press the arrow key until “Vertical magnification-printer” appears in the message display area.

1-47

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


5. “Vertical/horizontal magnification (drum clock)adjustment screen”Press the [COPY] key.

6. “Basic screen”Set the copy size to A3 or 11 x 17, and the copyquantity to 5, then press the START button andoutput an test pattern (No. 9).

7. Output five sheets of paper, and check for trans-fer jitter.

Check the transfer jitter at a point approx. 20mmfrom the trailing edge of the paper.


9. “Vertical/horizontal magnification (drum clock)adjustment screen”Enter a value through the numeric keys (thechange of a value should be made in two steps)and press the [SET] key.

• Setting range: -50 (reduction) ~ +50 (enlarge-ment)1 step = 0.09%

10.Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the transfer jitter in allfive output sheets disappears.

11. Once you have confirmed that there is no trans-fer jitter, press the arrow key, then select “Printer2” to adjust the vertical magnification of “Printer2”.

(2) Printer 2 vertical magnification adjustmentAdjust the vertical magnification of the printersystem.

Note:• Ensure that the printer's vertical magnification is

adjusted before going ahead with this adjustment



Press the [1. Drum clock adj.] key.4. “Vertical/horizontal magnification (drum clock)

adjustment screen”Press the arrow key until “Vertical magnification-printer 2” appears in the message display area.

5. Press the [COPY] key.6. “Basic screen”

Select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press theSTART button to print the test pattern.

7. Use a ruler to measure the vertical magnifica-tion.

• Standard value: 0.5% max (life size)Within ± 1mm with respect to 205.7mm


9. “Vertical/horizontal magnification (drum clock)adjustment screen”Enter a value from the numeric keys, then pressthe [SET] key.


10. Repeat the procedures 5 to 9 until the specifiedvalue is attained.

Approx.20mm

205.7 1

1-48

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


11. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “Timingadjustment menu screen”.

(3) Platen vertical magnification adjustmentAdjust the vertical magnification of the scannersystem.




adjustment screen”Press the arrow key until “Vertical magnification-platen” appears in the message display area.


Set the new test chart on the original glass andselect A3 or 11 x 17 size paper. Then press theSTART button.


• Standard value: ± 0.5% max (life size)Within ± 1mm with respect to 200mm




10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the vertical magnifica-tion becomes the standard value.


(4) Platen horizontal magnification adjustmentAdjust the horizontal magnification of the copysystem.

Note:• The result of the platen horizontal magnification

will be reflected all the images read by scanner(RADF, platen).




adjustment screen”Press the arrow key until “Horizontal magnifica-tion-platen” appears in the message displayarea.


Set the new test chart on the original glass andselect A3 or 11 x 17 size paper. Then press theSTART button.

7. Use a ruler to measure the horizontal magnifica-tion.

• Standard value: ± 0.5% max (life size)Within ± 1mm with respect to 200mm

8. Press the # button while pressing the ∗ button toreturn to the “Vertical/horizontal magnification(drum clock) adjustment screen”.


200

200

1-49

I A

DJU

STM

ENT



10.Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the horizontal magnifi-cation becomes the standard value.


(5) RADF vertical magnification adjustmentAdjust the vertical magnification while in RADFcopying.


Press the [Timing adj.] key.3. “Timing adjustment menu screen”

Press the [1. Drum clock adj.] key.4. “Vertical/Horizontal magnification (drum clock)

adjustment screen”Press the arrow key to select the magnificationyou want to adjust.The screen changes in the following order: Sin-gle sided 50% → 100% → 200% → 400% →Double sided 50% → 100% → 200% → 400%.

5. Press the [COPY] key.6. Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF and

select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper. Then press theSTART button.


• Standard value: ± 0.5% max (life size)Within ± 1.0mm with respect to 190mm


9. “Vertical/Horizontal magnification (drum clock)adjustment screen”Enter a value from the numeric keys, then pressthe [SET] key.



11. To adjust another adjustment item, press thearrow key to select the desired adjustment.


7.8.2 Restart timing adjustment

To adjust the restart timing.

A. Procedure1. Select the [2. Timing adj.] in the “36 mode menu

screen”, then the “Timing adjustment menuscreen” will appear.

2. Select the [2. Restart timing] on the “Timingadjustment menu screen”. then the “Restart tim-ing adjustment screen” will appear.

3. Using the arrow key will allow you to select thefollowing items.

• Restart timing adjustment : Engine (All)• Restart timing adjustment : Engine (Main body

upper tray)• Restart timing adjustment : Engine (Main body

lower tray)• Restart timing adjustment : Engine (DB1)• Restart timing adjustment : Engine (DB2)• Restart timing adjustment : Engine (LCT)• Restart timing adjustment : Engine (By-pass)• Restart timing adjustment : Engine (ADU)• Restart timing adjustment : RADF (single side)• Restart timing adjustment : RADF (double side,

front)• Restart timing adjustment : RADF (double side,

back)4. Enter a desired value from the numeric keys on

the screen, then press the [SET] key to validateyour entry.

[1] Vertical magnification

[1]190

1-50

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


5. Turn on the Basic Screen by pressing the[COPY] key, then make a test copy from thebasic screen.

6. Press the # button while pressing the ∗ button toreturn to the “Horizontal/Vertical magnificationadjustment screen”.

7. Press the [RETURN] key in the “Restart timingadjustment screen” to return to the “Timingadjustment menu screen”.

(1) Engine restart timing adjustment



Press the [2. Restart timing] key.4. “Restart timing adjustment screen”

Press the arrow key until the desired adjustmentitem appears in the message display area.


Select a maximum paper size for the tray youwant to adjust and press START to output thetest pattern.

7. Check the restart timing.• Standard value: ± 2.0mm max.8. If it is not within specification, press the # button

while holding down the ∗ button.9. “Restart timing adjustment screen”

Enter a value from the numeric keys, then pressthe [SET] key.

• Setting range: -127 (slow) ~ +127 (fast)1 step = 0.1mm

10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the restart timingbecomes the standard value.



(2) RADF restart timing adjustment

Reference:• The operation described here is the same as the

adjustment in “36 mode menu screen” - [9. RADFadj.].



Press the [2. Restart timing] key.4. “Restart timing adjustment screen”

Press the arrow key until the desired RADFadjustment item appears in the message displayarea.


Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF andselect A3 or 11 x 17 size paper. Then press theSTART button.

• Adjustment the “RADF double side (secondside)”, then make a test copy in double side →single side mode and check the restart timing of2nd output paper.

7. Check the restart timing.• Standard value: ± 3.0mm max. (life size)8. If it is not within specification, press the # button

while holding down the ∗ button.9. “Restart timing adjustment screen”


• Setting range: -50 (slow) ~ +50 (fast)1 step = 0.1mm

10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the restart timingbecomes the standard value.

11. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the timingadjustment menu screen.

1-51 1

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


1

7.8.3 Paper feed loop amount adjustment

If a paper is skewed, adjust the amount of the loopfor each tray.



2. Select the [3. Paper loop adj.] on the “36 modemenu screen”, then the “Paper feed loopamount adjustment screen” will appear.


• Paper feed loop adjustment : All• Paper feed loop adjustment : Main body upper

tray• Paper feed loop adjustment : Main body lower

tray (small size) B5 only• Paper feed loop adjustment : Main body lower

tray (large size) Other than B5• Paper feed loop adjustment : DB upper tray

(small size) Other than A3, B4, 11x17 and8.5x14.

• Paper feed loop adjustment : DB upper tray(large size) A3, B4, 11x17 and 8.5x14

• Paper feed loop adjustment : DB lower tray(small size) Other than A3 and 11x17

• Paper feed loop adjustment : DB lower tray(large size) A3 and 11x17

• Paper feed loop adjustment : LCT• Paper feed loop adjustment : Bypass (normal

paper)• Paper feed loop adjustment : Bypass (thick

paper)• Paper feed loop adjustment : Bypass (post card)• Paper feed loop adjustment : ADU (excepting

5.5 x 8.5R)• Paper feed loop adjustment : ADU (5.5 x 8.5R)• Paper feed loop adjustment : RADF (single side)4. Enter a desired value from the numeric keys on



6. Press the # button while pressing the ∗ button toreturn to the “Paper feed loop quantity adjust-ment screen”.

7. Press the [RETURN] key in the “Paper feed loopquantity adjustment screen” to return to the“Timing adjustment menu screen”.

(1) Paper feed loop adjustment for engine



Press the [3. Paper loop adj.] key.4. “Paper feed loop amount adjustment screen”

Press the arrow key until the desired adjustmentitem appears in the message display area.


Select a tray and a paper size properly andpress START to output the test pattern.

7. Check the skewing condition.8. When the paper feed loop quantity is not appro-

priate, press the # button while pressing the ∗button.

9. “Paper feed loop amount adjustment screen”Enter a value from the numeric keys, then pressthe [SET] key.

• Setting range: -100 ~ +151 step = 0.23mm

10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the paper feed loopamount becomes appropriate.


1-52

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


(2) Paper feed loop adjustment for RADF


adjustment in “36 mode menu screen” - [9. RADFadj.].



Press the [3. Paper loop adj.] key.4. “Paper feed loop amount adjustment screen”

Press the arrow key until “RADF” appears in themessage display area.


Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF andselect A3 or 11 x 17 size paper. Then press theSTART button.

7. Check the condition of skewing in the outputcopy.

8. When the paper feed loop quantity is not appro-priate, press the # button while pressing the ∗button.


• Setting range: -10 (small) ~ +10 (large)1 step = 0.5mm

10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the skewing conditionis correct.


7.8.4 Leading edge original erasure adjustment

Adjust the leading edge original erasure (leadingedge blank cut) amount.

Note:• If you reduce the erasure width, a black line may

appear on the leading edge of the paper whenyou make an enlarged copy.



Press the [4. Lead edge timing] key.4. “Leading edge original erasure adjustment

screen”Press the [COPY] key.

5. “Basic screen”Place the test chart on the platen glass. Select amaximum paper size for the tray you want toadjust and press START.

6. Measure the leading edge original erasure.• Standard value: Within 3.0mm7. If it is not within specification, press the # button

while holding down the ∗ button.8. “Leading edge original erasure adjustment

screen”Enter a value from the numeric keys, then pressthe [SET] key.


9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the leading edge origi-nal erasure amount becomes the standardvalue.


1-53 1

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


7.8.5 Centering adjustment

In the centering adjustment, the centering of theimage is adjusted in the direction at a right angle tothe feed direction.



2. Select the [5. Centring adj.] on the “Timingadjustment menu screen”, then the centeringadjustment screen will appear.


(1) Each of tray adjustments• Centering adjustment : All• Centering adjustment : Main body upper tray

(common, small size, large size)• Centering adjustment : Main body lower tray

(common, small size, large size)• Centering adjustment : DB upper tray

(common, small size, large size)• Centering adjustment : DB lower tray

(common, small size, large size)• Centering adjustment : LCT• Centering adjustment : ADU

(common, small size, large size)• Centering adjustment : By-pass

(common, small size, large size)

(2) Platen adjustment• Centering adjustment : Platen

(3) RADF adjustment• Centering adjustment : RADF

(single side, double side front, double side back)

4. Enter a desired value from the numeric keys onthe screen, then press the [SET] key to validateyour entry.


6. Press the # button while pressing the ∗ button toreturn to the centering adjustment screen.

7. Press the [Preceding screen] key in the “Center-ing adjustment screen” to return to the “Timingadjustment menu screen”.

(1) Each tray centering adjustment



Press the [5. Centring adj.] key.4. “Centering adjustment screen”

Press the arrow key until the desired trayappears in the message display area.


Select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press theSTART button to print the test pattern.

7. Fold the output at the center in the paper feeddirection, and check that the left and right linesoverlap completely.

• Standard value: Within ± 2mm8. If it is not within specification, press the # button

while holding down the ∗ button.9. “Centering adjustment screen”


• Setting range: -53 (inward direction of the centerline) ~ +53 (rear direction of the center line)1 step = 0.09mm

10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the miscentering iswithin standard value.

Note:• If it can not be adjusted within the specified

range, see “Other Adjustments”.



1-54

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


(2) ADU centering adjustment

Note:• Be sure to perform the centering adjustment for

each tray before starting this adjustment.




Press the arrow key until “ADU” appears in themessage display area.


Select copy mode to single side → double sidemode, then press the START button to print thetest pattern.

7. Fold the output at the center in the paper feeddirection, and check that the left and right linesoverlap completely.

• Standard value: Back : Within ± 3mmFront and back : Within ± 3mm


9. “Centering adjustment screen”Enter a value from the numeric keys, then pressthe [SET] key.





(3) Platen centering adjustment






Press the arrow key until “Platen” appears in themessage display area.


Set the new test chart on the original glass andselect A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press theSTART button.

7. Check the miscentering by comparing the origi-nal with the copy.







[1] Lengthwise direction[2] Miscentering amount between first side

and second side

[1][2]

1-55 1

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


1

(4) RADF centering adjustment






Press the arrow key until “RADF” appears in themessage display area.


Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF andselect A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press theSTART button.

• Adjust the “RADF (double side (second side))”,then make a test copy in double side → singleside mode and check the loop amount of 2ndoutputted paper.






10.Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the miscentering iswithin standard value.


7.8.6 Image read point adjustment

Adjust the image read point (leading edge timing).For the image read position adjustment, the follow-ing two types are available:• Platen adjustment• RADF adjustment

Note:• Be sure to perform the restart timing adjustment

(engine) before starting this adjustment.• The RADF read position adjustment is inhibited in

the field.• If you shift this value by a large amount, the

RADF read density may change.



Press the [6. Read point adj.] key.4. “Image read point adjustment screen”

Select the “Platen adjustment”, and press the[COPY] key.

5. “Basic screen”Set the new test chart on the original glass andselect A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press theSTART button.

6. Make a comparison between original image andtest copy image. Then check the image readpoint.

• Standard value: 10 ± 1.0mm7. If it is not within specification, press the # button

while holding down the ∗ button.8. “Image read point adjustment screen”



9. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the image read point iswithin standard value.


1-56

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


7.8.7 Recall standard data

Reset the adjusted set values of timing adjustmentto the standard values (factory default data).The following are included in the return to standarddata:• Recall standard data : Vertical/Horizontal magni-

fication adjustment• Recall standard data : Restart timing adjustment• Recall standard data : Paper feed loop amount

adjustment• Recall standard data : Leading edge original era-

sure adjustment• Recall standard data : Centering adjustment• Recall standard data : Original read point adjust-

ment



Press the [7. Factory default] key.4. “Resetting standard data screen”

Press the arrow key until the desired itemappears in the message display area.

5. Press the [YES] key to reset the set values tothe standard values that have been selectedand to return to the “Timing adjustment menuscreen”. Press the [NO] or [RETURN] key, thenthe set values are not reset and return to the“Timing adjustment menu screen”.

6. To reset another adjustment item, repeat steps4 to 5.


7.9 Running test mode

Conduct a test while in continuous copying opera-tion.Select the [3. Running mode] in the “36 mode menuscreen”, then the “Running test mode menu screen”will appear.

The following items can be selected:A. Intermittent copy mode

In this mode, after the set number of copy oper-ations has been completed, the machine goesinto the copy ready status, waits 0.5 sec., thenstarts the same operation again.

B. Paperless intermittent copy modeIt makes copies at roughly the same timing asfor a normal copy, without performing paperdetection or jam detection. Also, like runningmode 1, after the set number of copy opera-tions has been completed, the machine goesinto the copy ready status, waits 0.5 sec., thenstarts the same operation again.

C. Paperless modeIt makes copies at roughly the same timing asfor a normal copy, without performing paperdetection or jam dection.

D. Paperless/endless modeIt automatically sets the copy quantity to infinity.Also, like running mode 3, it makes copies atroughly the same timing as for a normal copy,without performing paper detection or jamdetection.

E. Running modeRunning mode consists of paperless/endlessmode plus an operation consisting of an opticseach-time scan and an automatic paper feedtray change.

1-57

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


7.9.1 Setting method


Press the [3. Running mode] key.3. “Running test mode menu screen”

Press the key according to the desired mode.(Mode 1 to Mode 5)

4. “Basic screen”Press the START button.

5. After checking the copy operation, press theStop button to stop copy operation.

6. Press the # button while pressing the ∗ button toreturn to the “Running mode menu screen”.

7. To perform another running test mode, repeatsteps 3 to 6.

8. Press the [RETURN] key to return to “36 modemenu screen”.

7.10 Test pattern output

Output various test patterns and use the results todetach defective parts.Select the [4. Test pattern] in the “36 mode menuscreen”, then the test pattern output screen willappear.

Note:• For modes not listed specifically on the SHB, out-

put should not be made.


Press the [4. Test pattern] key.3. “Test pattern output screen”

Enter a pattern number to be output fromnumeric key.

4. Press the [COPY] key.5. “Copy screen”

Select A3 or 11 x 17 and press the start buttonto output a test pattern.

6. When you want to output another test pattern,press the # button while pressing the ∗ buttonand repeat the procedures 3 to 5 above.


1-58

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


No.1 Overall halftone

[Check Items]• When the density is set to 70 (halftone)

When there are white stripes, black stripes or uneven density found, check the printer system for anyabnormality.[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, and cleaning unit

• When the density is set to 0 (white)When there is image gray back ground, check the printer system for any abnormality.[Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, and high voltage contact

• When the density is set at 255 (black)When the density is thin, check the printer system for any abnormality.[Recommended check point]: Write unit

* For information about setting the density, see “7.11 Test pattern density adjustment” below.

Test Pattern

When the density is set to 70 When the density is set to 0 When the density is set to 255

1-59

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


No.5 Gradation pattern

[Check Items]• Check the pattern to see if the laser output of LD1/LD2 is uniform with the gradation continuously repro-

duced.[Recommended checkpoints]: Write unit, and LD1/LD2 offset adjustment

* For LD1/LD2 offset adjustment, see “1. Process adjustment”.

Test Pattern

LD1 LD2

1-60

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


No.11 Beam check

[Check Items 1]• For developement and analysis of the write unit

[Check Items 2]• Check the solid black pattern to see if there is uneven density found in the main scanning and sub-scan-

ning directions.[Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, transfer/separation corona unit, and developing unit

[Check Items 3]• Check to see if there is any image repelling in the gradation pattern at the leading/trailing edge of the

test pattern in the feed direction.[Recommended checkpoint]: Transfer/separation corona unit

Test Pattern

[1] Solid black pattern [2] Gradation pattern

[2]

[1]

1-61

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern

[Check Items]

Judge from this test pattern which of the scanner system and the printer system is abnormal.Items that can be checked include horizontal magnification, vartical magnification, tilt image, and lead-ing edge timing of the printer system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the test pattern, the scanner system is defective.

Test Pattern

[1] Edge of pager

31mm 237mm

190mm

20m

m19

0mm

190m

m

280m

m

280mm

205.

7mm

[1]

[1]

1-62

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


7.11 Test pattern density adjust-ment

Density of respective patterns is adjusted in the fol-lowing procedure.


Press the [5. Density adj.] key.3. “Print density adjustment menu screen”

Press the [1. Print density adj. (1)] Key.4. “Print density adjustment screen”

Press the key according to the desired test pat-tern to be adjusted.

5. Enter a desired density by a numeric value fromthe numeric keys, then press the [SET] key.Input range : 000 (light) to +255 (dark).


Press the START button to output a test pattern.8. Check the density of the output test pattern.9. Press the # button while pressing the ∗ button to

return to the “Print density adjustment screen”.10. To adjust another test pattern, repeat steps 4 to

9.11. Press the [RETURN] key to return to “Print den-

sity adjustment menu screen”.

7.12 Image quality adjustment

This function adjusts the image quality adjustment.The following are shown on the image qualityadjustment menu:• RADF scan density adj.• Non-image area erase check.

7.12.1 RADF scanning density adjustment

When the slit glass is replaced, adjust the densitywhen reading the original with the RADF.

Note:• The mechanical adjustment, optical adjustment

and electrical adjustment of the scanner are com-pleted.

• Make sure that the slit glass is cleaned.• Make sure that the white chart is not dirty or

folded.


Press the [6. Image quality adj] key.3. “Image quality adjustment screen”

Press the [1. RADF Scan density adj.] key.4. “RADF Scanning density adjustment screen”

Set the white chart in A4 direction on the RADF.5. Press the [START] key.6. Check that “Completed” appears in the mes-

sage display area.7. If “ERROR” appears in the message display

area, then repeat steps 4 and 5.

Note:• If “ERROR” is displayed repeatedly, there is a

possibility of a defect in the adjustment of thescanner machine, optics, or electricrelated parts.

8. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “Imagequality adjustment screen”.

1-63

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


7.12.2 Non-image area erase check

Carry out a survey of the installation environmentafter the machine is newly installed or moved to adifferent location.Preparation:• Be sure that the RADF is fully open.• Do not place anything on the platen glass.• The platen glass must not be dirty.


Press the [6. Image quality adj] key.3. “Image quality adjustment screen”

Press the [2. Non-image Area Erase check] key.4. “Non-image area erase check screen”

Press the [START] key.5. Confirm that “Operation OK” appears on the

message display.If “Operation NG” appears, carry out non-origi-nal erasure installation survey once again whileseeing to “Trouble and Remedy” below.

6. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “Imagequality adjustment screen”.

B. <Trouble and Remedy>

(1) Warning-1Adjust for Extreme Brightness. In many cases, theNonimage-area-erase function will not operate cor-rectly.Please confirm “adjustment” - “36 mode” columns ofthe Service Hand book.

(2) Remedy-1If you use the non-original erasure function, or copyoriginals that have a dark background using thenonoriginal erasure method, relatively infrequently,use the machine in its present installation environ-ment.If, however, you copy originals that have a darkbackground fairly frequently, re-install the machinein a dark location and facing a direction such thatexternal light does not get into it, then carry out theinstallation survey once again.

(3) Warning-2A datum with potentioal not to function non-imagea-rea-erase is found.Please confirm “adjustment” - “36 mode” columns ofthe Service Hand book.

(4) Remedy-2If you use the non-original erasure function rela-tively infrequently, you can use the machine in itspresent installation environment.If, however, you copy originals that have a darkbackground fairly frequently, re-install the machinein a dark location and facing a direction such thatexternal light does not get into it, then carry out theinstallation survey once again. In this case, if thereis a bright light source, such as a fluorescent light,directly above the machine, reconsider the installa-tion location and direction, or take steps to block offthe light from the light source (by using a cover, forexample), then carry out the installation surveyonce again.

1-64

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


7.13 List print

Select the [7. List Print] from the “36 mode menuscreen” to display the list print menu screen.You can select following menu options from thisscreen.• Test pattern• Font pattern• Memory dump list• Management list• Adjustment list• Log list (1)• Log list (2)• Analysing list

Note:• Don't try to touch a mode not mentioned.

A. Test patternThis option is used to output a grid pattern con-sisted of line width of 2 dots and line-to-linespace of 500 dots. From this pattern, you cancheck the write system for normal performance.

B. Font patternThis option outputs the font list built in theengine.

C. Memory dump listThis option is used to dump out data (in HEXand ASCII format) after the address specified inE-RDH memory (this list is referenced for trou-bleshooting).

D. Management listThis option outputs the machine status, counterinformation and history of jam and so on.

E. Adjustment listThis option outputs a list of current adjustingvalues in the 25/36 mode.

F. Log list (1)The data from the memory is dumped in theHEX format and the ASCII format. (for analyz-ing trouble)Normally not used.

G. Log list (2)The data from the memory is dumped in theHEX format and the ASCII format. (for analyz-ing trouble)Normally not used.

H. Analysing listOutputs the necessary list prints together iftrouble occurs in the field. (for analysing trou-ble)Normally not used.

(1) Procedure1. Enter the 36 mode.2. “36 mode menu screen”

Press the [7. List print] key.3. “List print menu screen”

Press the key corresponding to the desiredmenu option.

4. “List print screen”When outputting the memory dump list, specifythe start and end addresses.

Note:• The memory dump list is dump output in both the

HEX and ASCII format.


Press the [START] key to output the list.7. Press the # button while depressing the ∗ button

to return to the list print screen.8. When outputting another list, repeat above

steps 3 to 7.9. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the list

print menu screen.

1-65

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


7.14 Counter clear

The counter must be cleared whenever the drum orfixing parts/unit is replaced.Select the [8. Counter Clear] from the 36 modemenu screen to display the counter clear screen.Following menu options are available from thisscreen.• Drum related counter (Drum counter, Drum drive

counter).• Fixing counter (Fixing web counter).


Press the [8. Counter clear] key.3. “Counter clear screen”

Press the key corresponding to the item to becleared.

4. Message in the message display area will con-firm if you really want to clear the item. Pressthe [YES] key. When the item is cleared, the“Counter clear screen” will be restored.

5. When clearing another counter, repeat abovesteps 3 and 4.

6. Press the [RETURN] key to return to “36 modemenu screen”.

Reference:• The operation here is the same as [2. PM count] -

[3. Counter clear] on the “25 mode menu screen”.

7.15 Adjustment of RADF

Adjustments of RADF are performed in the follow-ing procedures. For the adjustment, A3 or 11 x 17copy paper should be used.

A. Procedure1. Select the [9. RADF adj.] from the “36 mode

menu screen” to display the RADF adjustmentmenu.The following are included in the RADF adjust-ment:

“1 Vertical/horizontal magnification (Drum clock)adjustment”“2 Restart timing adjustment”“3 Paper feed loop amount adjustment”“4 Centering adjustment”“5 RADF scanning density adjustment”2. Press the key corresponding to the desired

item. The screen corresponding to the selecteditem will appear.

3. Press the [Preceding screen] key in each of theRADF adjustment screens to return to the“RADF adjustment menu screen”.

7.15.1 Vertical magnification adjustment in RADF system

Adjust the vertical magnification of the RADF.


menu screen” to display the “RADF adjustmentmenu”.

2. Select [1. Drum clock adj.] from the “RADFadjustment menu” and the “Magnificationscreen” will appear.


• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (singleside, 50%)




1-66

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (dou-ble side, 50%)




4. Enter a desired value from the numeric keys onthe screen, then press the [SET] key to validateyour entry.


6. Press the # button while depressing the ∗ buttonto return to the “Magnification adjustmentscreen”.

7. Press the [Preceding screen] key in the “Verti-cal/horizontal magnification adjustment screen”to return to the “RADF adjustment menuscreen”.

B. Vertical magnification adjustment in RADFsystem

Adjust the vertical magnification while in RADFcopying.


Press the [9. RADF adj.] key.3. “RADF adjustment menu screen”

Press the [1. Drum clock adj.] key.4. “Vertical/Horizontal magnification (drum clock)

adjustment screen”Press the arrow key to select the magnificationyou want to adjust.The screen changes in the following order: Sin-gle sided 50% → 100% → 200% → 400% →Double sided 50% → 100% → 200% → 400%.

5. Press the [COPY] key.6. Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF and

select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper. Then press theSTART button.


• Standard value: ± 0.5% max (life size)Within ± 1.0mm with respect to 190mm


9. “Vertical/Horizontal magnification (drum clock)adjustment screen”Enter a value from the numeric keys, then pressthe [SET] key.




12. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “RADFadjustment menu screen”.

7.15.2 Adjustment of restart timing

Use the following procedure to adjust the RADFrestart timing.


menu screen” to display the “RADF adjustmentmenu”.

2. Select [2. Restart timing] from the “RADFadjustment menu” and the “Re-start timingadjustment screen” will appear.

[1] Vertical magnification

[1]190

1-67

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


1


• Restart timing adjustment : RADF (single side)• Restart timing adjustment : RADF (double side,

front)• Restart timing adjustment : RADF (double side,

back)4. Enter a desired value from the numeric keys on



6. Check the restart timing.Standard value: -3.0mm maximum (Life size).

7. If it is not within specification, press the # buttonwhile depressing the ∗ button

8. “Restart timing adjustment screen”Enter the value from the numeric keys, thenpress the [SET] key.

• Setting range: -50 (delays the timing) ~ +50 (advances the timing)1 step = 0.1mm

9. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the re-start timingmeets the standard value.

10. Press the [RETURN] key in the “Restart timingadjustment screen” to return to the “RADFadjustment menu screen”.

7.15.3 Paper feed loop adjustment


adjustment in “36 mode menu screen” -[2. Timingadjustment].

Adjust the paper feed loop quantity while in RADFcopying.



Press the [3. Paper Loop adj.] key.4. “Paper feed loop amount adjustment screen”

Press the [COPY] key.

5. “Basic screen”Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF andselect A3 or 11 x 17 size paper. Then press theSTART button.

6. Check paper feed loop volume.7. When the paper feed loop quantity is not appro-

priate, press the # button while pressing the ∗button.


• Setting range: -10 (decrease) ~ 00 (standard) ~+10 (increase)1 step = 0.5mm

9. Repeat above steps 4 to 8 until an appropriatepaper feed loop volume is obtained.


7.15.4 Centering adjustment


adjustment in “36 mode menu screen” -[2. Timingadjustment].

Adjust the centering of the image in the direction ata right angle to the original feed direction of theRADF. For adjustment items, the following threeitems can be selected:• Centering adjustment : RADF (single side)• Centering adjustment : RADF (double side, front)• Centering adjustment : RADF (double side,

back)




Press the arrow key until the desired itemappears in the message display area.

5. Press the [COPY] key.

1-68

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


6. “Basic screen”Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF andselect A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press theSTART button.

• When the RADF (double side, back) is selected,make copies from double side → single sidemode, and use the second for the adjustment.








7.15.5 RADF scanning density adjustment

Whenever the slit glass is replaced, its density inreading an original must be adjusted in the followingmanner.

Note:• Before starting this operation, every adjustment

must be completed for the scanner's mechanical,optical and electric system.

• Make sure that the slit glass must be cleaned.• Make sure that the white chart is not stained or

folded.



Press the [5. RADF Scan density adj.] key.4. “RADF scanner density adjustment screen”

Set the white chart in A4 direction on the RADF.5. Press the [START] key.

6. Make sure that the message “Completed” isindicated in the message display area.

7. If the message “ERROR” appears in the mes-sage display area, repeat above steps 4 and 5.

Note:• If “ERROR” is displayed repeatedly, there is a

possibility of a defect in the adjustment of thescanner machine, optics, or electricrelated parts.


7.15.6 RADF image read point adjustment

Adjust the original read position while in RADFcopying.

Note:• The RADF read position adjustment is inhibited in

the field.

7.16 FNS adjustment (FS-112 only)

Adjust the alignment plate position of the finisher.When the sheets of paper exited from the finisherare uneven, adjust the corresponding paper size.


Press the [10. FNS adj.] key.3. “FNS adjustment menu screen”

Press [1. FNS alignment plate position adjust-ment (rear)] or [2. FNS alignment plate positionadjustment (front)].

4. “FNS matching plate position adjustmentscreen”Press the arrow key until the target paper size ofthe adjustment is displayed.

5. Press the [Copy screen] key to display the basicscreen. Set the output setting to the group modeand press the [OK] key.Conduct the test copy on the paper size inwhich irregularity occurs.

1-69

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


1

6. Check the positions of the alignment plate andthe paper from the paper exit side.

7. When irregularity still recurs, press the # buttonwhile pressing the ∗ button.

8. “FNS matching plate position adjustmentscreen”Enter an adjusting value from the numeric keys,then press the [SET] key.


9. To adjustment of another paper size, select itfrom the arrow keys, then repeat steps 4 to 7.

10. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “FNSadjustment menu screen”.

7.17 FNS adjustment (FS-114 only)

Perform each finisher adjustment.

7.17.1 Fold & Stitch position adjustment (SK-114)

Adjust the fold & stitch position of the saddle kit.It is adjusted when the stapling unit 1 or 2 isreplaced, when the staple position is not correct,and when the staple tile adjustment is performed.

A. Procedure1. Enter the 36 mode.2. On the “36 mode menu screen”,

select [10. FNS adj.].3. On the “FNS adj. menu screen”,

select [1. Fold&Stitch posit adj.].4. On the “Fold & Stitch posit adj. screen”,

select the paper size you want to adjust byusing the arrow keys.

5. Set five A4 originals in the ADF.6. Press the [Copy screen] key to output a

fold&stitch sample.7. Fold the output sample along its crease.8. Check the distance between the fold and staple

positions.• Standard A, B: 0 ± 1.5mm

9. If it is not within the standard, press # buttonwhile pressing ∗ button.

10.On the “Fold & Stitch position adj. screen”, enter a numeric value using the numeric key-pad. Then, press [SET] key.


• In case of A: set a plus value• In case of B: set a minus value11. Repeat the steps 4 through 9 until the

fold&stitch position comes within the standardrange.

12. Press [RETURN] and go back to the “FNS adj.menu screen”.

A

4511D528AA

Fold

Exit direction

4511D527AA

B

Fold

Exit direction

1-70

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


7.17.2 Fold position adjustment (SK-114)

Adjust the fold position of the saddle kit.It is adjusted when the fold unit is replaced, whenthe fold position is incorrect, and when the foldingtilt adjustment is performed.



select [2. Fold position adj.].4. On the “Fold position adj. screen”, select the

paper size you want to adjust by using the arrowkeys.

5. Press the [Copy screen] key to output a foldsample.

6. Fold the output sample along its crease.7. Check the misalignment.• Standard A, B: 0 ± 1.5mm


9. On the “Fold position adj. screen”, enter a numeric value using the numeric key-pad. Then, press [SET] key.


• In case of A: set a plus value• In case of B: set a minus value10. Repeat the steps 4 through 8 until the fold posi-

tion comes within the standard range.11. Press [RETURN] and go back to the “FNS adj.

menu screen”.

7.17.3 Punch position adjustment (PK-114)

Adjust the hole positions of the punch kit.



select [3. Punch position adj.].4. Press the [Copy screen] key to output a

punched sample.5. Check the hole positions on the sample.• Standard A: 13 ± 3mm (2 holes)

9.5 ± 3mm (2 holes and 3 holes)11 ± 3mm (4 holes)

4511D525AA

A

Exit direction

4511D526AA

B

Exit direction

A

[1] [2]7145fs1040

Exit direction

A

[1] [2]7145fs1041

1-71 1

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


1


7. On the “Punch position adj. screen”, enter a numeric value using the numeric key-pad. Then, press [SET] key.


• To shift in [1] direction: set a plus value• To shift in [2] direction: set a minus value8. Repeat the steps 4 through 7 until the punch

positions come within the standard range.9. Press [RETURN] and go back to the “FNS adj.

menu screen”.

7.17.4 Punch loop adjustment (PK-114)

Adjust the loop amount of the punch kit.It is adjusted when the punch holes are tilted, orwhen paper frequently jams in punch mode.



select [4. Punch loop adj.].

4. On the “Punch loop adj. screen”, select thepaper size you want to adjust by using the arrowkeys.

5. Press the [Copy screen] key to output apunched sample.

6. Check the tilt of holes on the sample.7. If the holes are tilted, press # button while

pressing ∗ button.8. On the “Punch loop adj. screen”,

enter a numeric value using the numeric key-pad. Then, press [SET] key.


• In case of [1]: set a minus value• In case of [2]: set a plus value9. Repeat the steps 4 through 7 until there is no tilt.10. Press [RETURN] and go back to the “FNS adj.

menu screen”.

A

[1] [2]7145fs1042

A

[1] [2]7145fs1043

[2][1] 7145fs1044

[2][1] 7145fs1045

1-72

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


8. 47 MODE

8.1 47 mode setting method

A. 47 ModeThis mode provides self-diagnostic functions (input/output check function) to check and adjustment thevarious signals and loads.

B. Operation method (to start 47 mode)(1) 47 Mode startupa. Turn the SW2 (Sub power switch) OFF.b. Turn the SW2 (Sub power switch) ON while

holding down 4 and 7 of the numeric keys.c. The moment “I/O check mode” is displayed

in the message display area at the center ofthe screen, check to see if the 47 mode isactivated.

“47 mode menu screen”

(2) Input check methoda. Using the numeric keys, enter the code

input for the desired signal (sensor, etc.) tocheck.

b. When using the multi mode, press the ∗ but-ton and enter the multi code according tothe desired input check item (signal) withthe numeric keys.

c. Procedure1. Enter the 47 mode.2. “47 mode menu screen”

Using the numeric keys, enter the input checkcode. *1

3. When using the multi mode, press the ∗ button.4. Using the numeric keys, enter the multi code.*15. Input check result will appear in the input check

result display area.6. To check other signal input check, repeat steps

2 to 5.*1 See “[5] Input check list”.

(3) Output check methoda. Enter the output code (see the input/output

check code) of the operating load you wantto check with the number of sheets settingbutton.

b. When using the multi mode, press the ∗ but-ton and enter the multi code according tothe desired output check item (load).

c. Press the [START] key to perform the outputcheck.

d. To end the output check, press the [STOP]key.

e. Procedure1. Enter the 47 mode.2. “47 mode menu screen”

Using the numeric keys, enter the output checkcode.*2

3. When using the multi mode, press the ∗ button.4. Using the numeric keys, enter the multi code.*25. Press the [START] key to perform the output

check.6. To end the output check, press the [STOP] key.7. To make another output check, repeat steps 2 to

6.*2 See “[6] Output check list”.

(4) Exiting the 47 modeTo end the 47 mode, turn the SW2 OFF.

[1] Input/Output check code[2] Multi code[3] Input check[4] Output check

[1] [2] [3] [4]

1-73

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


1

8.2 RADF original size detection

This adjustment is done when RADF fails to cor-rectly detect size of an original.


Press “69” by means of the numeric keys.Check that “069-000” appears in the messagedisplay area.

3. Set the original guide plate to the minimum size(width) position, then press the [START] key.

4. To end the output check, press the [STOP] key.5. Press the ∗ button.6. Enter “1” from the the numeric keys.

Make sure that “069-001” is indicated in themessage display area.

7. Set the original guide plate to the maximum size(width) position, then press the [START] key.

8. To end the output check, press the [STOP] key.9. To end the 47 mode, turn the SW2 OFF.

8.3 By-pass size detection adjustment

Perform this adjustment if paper size detection atthe by-pass feed tray does not function correctly.


Press “28” by means of the numeric keys.Check that “028-000” appears in the messagedisplay area.

3. Set a sheet of A4R paper in the by-pass tray.4. Press the ∗ button.5. Press [1] by means of the numeric keys.

Check that “028-001” appears in the messagedisplay area.

6. Press the [START] key.7. Press the [STOP] key.8. Set a sheet of A4 paper in the by-pass tray.9. Press the ∗ button.10. Press “2” by means of the numeric keys.


11. Press the [START] key.12. To end the output check, press the [STOP] key.13. Set a sheet of B6R paper in the By-pass tray.14. Press the button.15. Press [3] by means of the numeric keys.


16. Press the [START] key.17. Press the [STOP] key.18. To end the 47 mode, turn the SW2 OFF.

8.4 Action for mounting whenreinstalling the HDD

Removing the HDD for analysis of an abnormalityand then reinstalling it after turning on and off thepower may result in no recognition of the HDD. Toavoid a condition like this, conduct this setting.

A. Procedure1. Enter the 47 mode.2. “47 mode setting screen”

Press the No. of sheets setting button to enter“15”. Check to see if “015-000” is displayed inthe message display column.

3. Press the ∗ button.4. Press the No. of sheets setting button to enter

“97”.Check to see if “015-097” is displayed in themessage display column.

5. Press the [START] key.6. Press the [STOP] key to terminate the setting.7. To end the 47 mode, turn the SW2 OFF.

Note:• When the data is in nonconformity, an error may

occur. In that case, execute the format (key oper-ator mode).

1-74

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


8.5 Input check list

*1 Paper size signal (Inch)

*1 Paper size signal (Metric)

Classification Symbol Code Multi code Name DisplayON OFF

Analog signal

TSCB 00 — Toner control sensor board (Drum temperature)

0 to 255

TSCB 01 — Toner control sensor board 0 to 255TSCB 02 — Toner control sensor board 0 to 255TH1 03 — Fxing temperature sensor /1 0 to 255TH2 04 — Fxing temperature sensor /2 0 to 255TDS 05 — Toner temperature sensor 0 to 255

HUM1 06 — Humidity sensor 0 to 255Paper feed PS8 10 1 No paper sensor /U Paper No paper

PS11 2 No paper sensor /LPS103 3 No paper sensor /3PS108 4 No paper sensor /4PS13 5 By-pass tray no paper sensor No paper Paper

PS153 6 No paper sensor (LT-203)PS7 12 1 Upper limit sensor /U Upper

limitNot at upper limit

PS10 2 Upper limit sensor /LPS102 3 Tray upper limit sensor /3PS107 4 Tray upper limit sensor /4PS152 6 Tray upper limit sensor (LT-203)

PS9 13 1 Tray set sensor /U Yes NoPS12 2 Tray set sensor /L

PS101 3 Tray sensor /3PS106 4 Tray sensor /4

— 16 1 Main body upper tray paper size sig-nal

0 to 9*1

— 2 Main body lower tray paper size signalPSDTB/3 3 Paper size detection signal board /3PSDTB/4 4 Paper size detection signal board /4

Tray Symbol displayed1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

1 B5 B4 A5R A4 A4R F4 5.5 x 8.5 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R 8.5 x 142,3,4 A5R A4 A4R A3 F4 5.5 x 8.5 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R 8.5 x 14 11 x 17


1 B5 B4 A5R A4 A4R F4 5.5 x 8.5 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R 8.5 x 142,3,4 B5 B4 A5R A4 A4R A3 F4 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R 11 x 17

1-75

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


*1 Paper size signal (Common)

*2 Judging code of the DB type


LCT(3) A4 A4R 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R B5R B5 A4 A4R 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R


Paper feed • Conveyance

PS1 20 1 Registration sensor Paper No paperPS104 2 Paper feed sensor /U (DB upper tray)PS105 3 Paper feed sensor /L (DB lower tray)PS21 4 Timing sensor /U (Main body upper tray)PS22 5 Timing sensor /L (Main body lower tray)PS155 6 Paper feed sensor (LT-203)SW151 7 Interlock switch (LT-203) Open Close

PS2 22 1 Fixing exit sensor Paper No paperSW3 23 1 Interlock switch Open CloseVR1 28 — By-pass tray paper size sensor VR 0 to 255

Scanner — 38 1 Measured LD alarm value (LD1) 0 to 255— 2 Measured LD alarm value (LD2) 0 to 255

PS14 40 1 Scanner home position sensor Other than H.P.

H.P.

PS15 2 APS timing sensor Open ClosePS17 3 APS sensor Original is

providedNo

originalIntrinsic functions

— 50 1 Check of DB serial communications 0001Normal

0000Abnormal or not con-

nected

— 2 Check of FNS serial communications— 3 Check of scanner serial communica-

tions51 1 Judging of the main body type

— 2 Judging of the DB type 0 to 6*2TLD 57 1 Toner level detector sensor Not

providedProvided

PS5 2 Toner bottle sensor Provided Not provided

Code 0 2 3 5 6Judging type Not connected DB-211 DB-411 DB-211 + LT-203 DB-411 + LT-203

1-76

I A

DJU

STM

ENT



RADF PS301 60 1 No original sensor Paper No paperPS304 2 Cover open/close sensor Open ClosePS303 3 DF open/close sensor Open ClosePS308 4 Original registration sensor No paper PaperPS309 5 Original conveyance sensorPS302 6 Original exit sensor Paper No paperPS305 7 Original size sensor /1PS306 8 Original size sensor /2VR301 9 Original size VR 0 to 255

FS-112 PS701 70 1 Pressure sensor (Level) No pressure

Pressure applied

PS705 2 Shutter sensor ON OFFPS701 3 Pressure sensor (HP) No

pressurePressure applied

PS704 4 Paper exit full sensor Other than full

Full

PS703 8 Exit sensor Paper No paperPS702 9 FNS entrance censorPS712 10 Stapler HP sensor Other

than H.P.H.P.

PS713 12 Staple detection sensor No staples

provided

Staples provided

PS714 14 Stapler ready sensor Stapler not ready

Stapler ready

— 16 24V detect 0V 24VPS711 17 Tray upper limit sensor Upper

limitNot at upper limit

PS706 18 Tray lower limit sensor Lower limit

Other than lower limit

PS707 19 No paper sensor Paper No paperPS708 20 Stapler unit HP sensor H.P. Other

than H.P.PS709 21 Alignment HP sensor /RPS710 22 Alignment HP sensor /F

1-77

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


FS-113 PC1 70 1 1st tray exit sensor Paper No paperPC3 2 Stacking sensorPC4 3 Upper path sensorPC2 4 Lower path sensorPC6 5 1st tray full detection sensorPC7 6 Elevate tray full detection sensorPC9 7 Alignment HP sensor H.P. Other

than H.P.PC14 8 Staple home sensorPC12 9 Stacking roller home sensorPC13 10 Paper exit roller home sensorPC5 11 Process tray paper detection sensor Paper No paper— 12 Stapler 1 home sensor H.P. Other

than H.P.— 13 Staple empty detection sensor 1 No

staples provided

Staples provided

— 14 Self-priming sensor 1 Stapler ready

Stapler not ready

— 15 Stapler 2 home sensor H.P. Other than H.P.

— 16 Staple empty sensor 2 No staples

provided

Staples provided

— 17 Self-priming sensor 2 Stapler ready

Stapler not ready

PWB-F 18 Elevate tray top face sensor Upper limit

Not at upper limit

PC8 19 Elevate tray paper extractor sensor ON OFFS2, S3 20 Elevate tray upper limit/lower limit

switchUpper limit

Not at upper limit

PC10 21 Shift home sensor H.P. Other than H.P.

S4 22 Punch 2-hole/3-hole detection sensor (inch system only)

2 holes 3 holes

PC15 23 Punch motor pulse sensor ON OFFPC11 24 Shift motor pulse sensor

RU-101 PS2 27 Passage sensor Paper No paper


1-78

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


FS-114 PC4-FN 70 1 Entrance sensor Paper exists

No paper

PC5-FN 2 Transport sensorPC6-FN 3 Alignment home position sensor 1 Home

positionExcept home

positionPC7-FN 4 Alignment home position sensor 2S3-FN 5 Elevate tray upper/lower limit SW Upper

limitExcept

upper limitS2-FN 6 Shutter detection SW Close OpenS1-FN 7 Front cover open/close detection SW

— 9 Pulse sensor Shade TransmitPC23-SK 10 In & out guide home position sensor Shade TransmitPC14-FN 11 Elevator tray lower limit sensor Shade TransmitPC15-FN 12 Top face detection sensor

— 13 BK-114 detection Equipped Not equipped

PC3-FN 14 Elevator tray position detect sensor Shade TransmitPC16-FN 15 Shutter home position sensor Home

positionExcept home

positionPC11-FN 17 Exit paddle home position sensorPC12-FN 18 Exit roller home position sensorPC8-FN 19 Storage tray paper detect sensor Paper exists No paperPC10-FN 20 Staple home position sensor Shade Transmit

— 21 Self-priming sensor— 22 Staple empty detection sensor— 23 Staple home sensor— 25 Punch position sensor 1 Transmit Shade— 26 Punch position sensor 2

PC1-PK 27 Punch trash full sensor Shade TransmitPC22-SK 28 Crease roller home position sensor Home

positionExcept home

positionS4-FN 29 Transport jam detection SW Close Open

PC26-SK 30 Layable guide home sensor Shade TransmitPC20-SK 31 Saddle exit sensor Paper exists No paperPC21-SK 32 Saddle tray empty sensor

— 33 Saddle staple home position sensor 1 Shade Transmit— 34 Saddle self-priming sensor 1— 35 Saddle staple empty detection sensor 1— 36 Saddle staple home position sensor 2— 37 Saddle self priming sensor 2— 38 Saddle staple empty detection sensor 2

S4-SK 39 Saddle interlock switch Open ClosePC18-SK 40 Saddle exit roller home position sensor Except home

positionHome

positionADU PS4 80 — ADU sensor Open Close


1-79 1

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


1

8.6 Output check list

Classification Symbol Code Multi code Name Cannot be set or changed in the field

High volt-age/image

L1 00 — Exposure lampM4 01 — Toner supply motor 1

M3 01 — Developing motorM1 01 — Main motorSD9 01 — Toner solenoidHV 02 — Charging X

03 — Transfer X04 — Separation (AC) X05 — Transfer + Separation (AC + DC) X06 — Separation (DC) X07 — Grid X08 — Dmax/γ LED X10 — Guide plate X11 — Bias X

PRMB 15 1 Service counter clear (Clears service related counter values from the PRMB (Parameter memory board))

2 Reuse counter clear (prohibited in the field) X10 EKC data block clear11 Job memory data block clear12 Arbitrary replacement parts data block

clear13 Coded dialing data block clear (for Fax)14 One touch data block clear (for Fax)15 Group data block clear (for Fax)16 Fax file format (for Fax)17 FL-102 related non-volatile data ini-

tialization (for Fax)18 E-Mail address list clear19 FTP address list clear20 Box No. list clear21 E-Mail Subject list clear22 E-Mail Body list clear97 HDD mounting measure98 Initialize KRDS non volatile area

1-80

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


Paper feed SD1 20 1 1st paper feed solenoid /USD2 2 1st paper feed solenoid /LSD3 3 By-pass solenoid

SD101 4 Paper feed solenoid /USD102 5 Paper feed solenoid /LSD151 6 LT Paper feed solenoid

M9 21 1 Paper feed motorM100 2 DB Paper feed motorM150 3 LT Paper feed motor

M7 23 1 Tray motor /UM8 2 Tray motor /L

M101 3 Tray up motor /3M102 4 Tray up motor /4M151 5 Tray up motor MC1 25 — Registration clutchMC2 26 — Loop clutch

— 28 1 By-pass size adjustment (A4R in width)— 2 By-pass size adjustment (A4 in width)

SD7 29 — Separation claw solenoidScanner M2 31 1 Scanner motor

M5 32 1 Polygon motor (steady rotation)M5 2 Polygon motor (Pre-rotation)

M2,L1 34 — Shading correction operationLD 36 — Laser PWM (0 to 255)

LD,M5 37 — Conpel to laser ONLD,M5 38 — LD alarm measurement

L1 39 — Platen still APSMain body M11 40 — Fixing motor

M1 41 1 Main motor (sequential)M1 2 Main motor (motor alone)

FM3 42 1 Internal dehumidifying fan /1FM4 2 Internal cooling fan /1FM2 3 Fixing cooling fanFM1 4 DC power supply cooling fanFM5 5 Developing suction fanFM6 6 Internal dehumidifying fan /2

FM3,FM6 7 Internal dehumidifying fan /1,2FM301 8 Cooling fan

FM7 9 Internal cooling fan /2 (low speed)FM7 10 Internal cooling fan /2 (high speed)TC 43 — Total counterL2 45 1 Fixing heater lamp /1L3 2 Fixing heater lamp /2


1-81

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


1

Operation panel

OB 48 — All LED ONOB 49 — Operation panel check (Checking for

LCD, keys, and buzzer)Intrinsic functions

M3 50 0 Developing motor (motor alone)M3 1 to 255 Developing motor (sequential)

• Use the multicode “1 to 255” to setthe No. of rotations.

PCL 51 — Pre-charging exposure lampTSL 52 — Transfer synchronization lampSD4 53 — Cleaning web solenoidM4 55 1 Toner supply motor 1

M4, SD9 2 Toner supply motor 1, Toner solenoidM10 56 1 Toner supply motor 2 (CW)M10 2 Toner supply motor 2 (CCW)TLD 57 — Toner level sensorSD9 58 — Toner supply solenoid— 59 — 24V power source remote

RADF M301 60 1 Original feed motor (CW)M301 2 Original feed motor (CCW)M303 3 Original reversal motor (CW)M303 4 Original reversal motor (CCW)M302 5 Original conveyance motor (CCW/50%)M302 6 Original conveyance motor (CCW/100%)M302 7 Original conveyance motor (CCW/400%)

SD302 8 Rollar pressure solenoidSD301 9 Paper exit solenoidSD303 10 Stamp solenoidVR301 69 0 Original size adjustment (small size)VR301 1 Original size adjustment (large size)

FNS M701 70 1 FNS conveyance motorM702 2 Paper exit motor (forward rotation)M702 3 Paper exit motor (reverse rotation)M707 4 Pressure motor (forward rotation)M707 5 Pressure motor (reverse rotation)M706 6 Tray up motor(raise)M706 7 Tray up motor (lower)M705 8 Stapler shift motor, (initialize) (A4/F)M705 9 Stapler shift motor, (initialize)(A4/R)

M703,M704 10 Alignment motor /R,F (initialize)M703,M704 11 Alignment motor /R,F (A4 size posi-

tion)M703,M704 12 Alignment motor /R,F (rocking)

M708 13 Stapler motor


1-82

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


FS-114 M1-FNM2-FNM3-FN

70 1 Exit motorTransport motorEntrance motor

M4-FNM5-FN

3 Alignment motor 1Alignment motor 2

M11-FN 5 Elevator motor (up)M11-FN 6 Elevator motor (down)M12-FN 7 Shutter opening motorM6-FN 11 Exit open/close motorM9-SK 12 Saddle exit open/close motorM7-FN 17 Stapling unit moving motor

M10-SK 23 Crease motorSL1-FN 53 Storage paddle solenoidSL2-FN 54 Exit paddle solenoid

— 78 Punch motor— 79 Punch motor

IT SD8 75 1 IT gate solenoidADU M6 80 1 230mm/sec forward rotation

M6 2 600mm/sec forward rotationM6 3 230mm/sec reverse rotationM6 4 600mm/sec reverse rotation

SD5 83 — ADU gate solenoidOthers — 90 — PM counter clear

— 91 0 Process counter clear (prohibited in the field) X— 1 Drum counter clear (prohibited in the field) X— 92 — PRMB (Parameter memory board) ini-

tialization(Process initial set/prohibited in the field)

X

— 93 — Initial settings— 95 — Automatic adjustment of L detection

reference value (prohibited in the field)

X

— 96 — Process delivery completing setting (prohibited in the field)

X

— 97 — Light distribution check— 98 — After completion of process shipment,

temporary initialization of the PRMB (Parameter memory board)

X

— 119 — Network initialization— 121 — Initialize fax-related nonvolatile memory

(prohibited in the field)X

— 197 — E-RDH (DRAM) capacity display— 198 — E-RDH (DRAM) capacity check— 999 — Checking of status control board (pro-

hibited in the field)X


1-83 1

I A

DJU

STM

ENT

OTHER ADJUSTMENTS KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003

9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS

Caution:• Be sure the power cord has been unplugged

from the wall outlet.

9.1 RADF height adjustment

A. Procedure1. Close the RADF.2. Open the open/close cover[1], then turn the

RADF height adjustment screw[2] until theRADF height adjust pointer[3] comes to centerof the scale divisions.

[1] [2]

[3]

1-84

I A

DJU

STM

ENT

KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS

9.2 RADF distortion adjustment

Adjust the amount of distortion of a copy in the fol-lowing procedures.

A. Procedure1. Set a A3 paper on the tray of the main body.2. Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF,

then make a copy.3. Check the amount of distortion in the copy.

Standard value: ± 0.3% less.

4. When the distortion is larger than the tolerance,adjust it using the skew adjustment screw[1].

• A: Turn the dskew adjustment screw[1] clock-wise.

• B: Turn the skew adjustment screw[1] counter-clockwise.

5. Repeat above steps 2 to 4 until the standardvalue for distortion is met.

[1] Paper feed direction

A B

[1]

[1]

1-85

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


9.3 RADF original skew adjust-ment (front side)

When the front side of the originals are fed beingskewed, adjust the registration pully bracket.

A. Procedure1. In the single sided → single sided copy mode,

set the adjustment chart to the RADF for copy-ing.

2. Check the original skew pattern.Standard value: Within ± 0.5%

3. When the skew is not up to the standard, openthe open/close cover[1], loosen the screw[3]and adjust the position of the registration pulleybracket[2].

• A: Move the registration pully bracket[2] down[4].• B: Move the registration pully bracket[2] up[5].4. Repeat above steps 1 to 3 until the standard

value for the skewed original is within standardvalue.

[1] Image[2] Paper[3] Paper feed direction

[1]

[2]

[3]

A B

[1]

[2]

[5]

[4]

[3]

1-86

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


9.4 RADF original skew adjust-ment (back side)

When the back side of the original is supplied on askew, adjust the clearance of the guide plate.

A. Procedure1. In the double sided → single sided copy mode,

set the adjustment chart to the RADF for copy-ing.

2. Check the original skew pattern.Standard value: Within ± 0.5%

[1] Image[2] Paper[3] Paper feed direction

[1]

[2]

[3]

A B

1-87

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


3. When the skew is not up to the standards, openthe open/close cover[1] and remove the 2 cov-ers[2].

4. Loosen the hexagon nut[3], and rotate the setscrew[4] to adjust the clearance of the guideplate.

• A: Loosen the hexagon nut[3] at the rear androtate the set screw[4] clockwise.

• B: Loosen the hexagon nut[3] at the front androtate the set screw[4] clockwise.

Note:• Since there is the possibility of jamming, be sure

not make the clearance of the guide plate nar-rower than the standard value. (Be sure not totighten the hexagon nut [3].)

• The reference value of the clearance of the guideplate should be determined based on the positionwhere the difference in level[A] of the secondstage of the clearance reference block[5]becomes flush with the metal frame surface[B].

5. Repeat the steps 1 to 4 until the original skewgets within the standard value.

[1] [2]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

1-88

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


9.5 DB-411 paper-centering adjustment

Make a copy of the test chart, then perform neces-sary adjustment until the standard value for thepaper centering is fit.

A. Procedure1. Loosen a screw[1] on the side guide situated at

bottom of the paper feed tray. And also loosenthe 2 screws[3] on the reinforcing plates (front/back)[2] situated at top of the tray.

2. Rotate the adjusting cam[4], move the sideguide back and forth and adjust it so that thecentering of the image center[6] to the papercenter[5] becomes within the specified value(within 3mm).

3. When the adjustment is complete, tighten thescrews provided for the side guide and reinforc-ing plates.

Note:• If paper miscentering occurs, move the side guide

forwards and backwards, and adjust the gap forthe paper in use to between 1.0 and 1.5mm.(The gap must be set so that the tray meets boththe lower limit position and the upper limit posi-tion.)

[2]

[3][1]

[4]

[7][6]

[5]

1-89

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


9.6 DB-411 tray tilt adjustment

Normal paper feed can't be expected if the tray istilted. In such case, adjust the tray and paper feedroller shaft so that they may be parallel in eachother. Whenever the wire is replaced, this adjust-ment must be implemented.

A. Procedure1. Remove the front cover of the tray.2. Loosen a screw[2] of the wire adjustment part[1]

situated in front side of the tray.

3. Position in front and in rear the 2 metal scales[2]in the tray[1] as shown in the drawing.

4. Move the wire adjustment part[3] until the dis-tance from top of the side plate to the tray[1] topface is equal in both the front and back sides.

5. When the adjustment is complete, tighten thescrew[4] for the wire adjustment part[3].

[1]

[2]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

1-90

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


9.7 LT tray tilt adjustment

Normal paper feed can't be expected if the tray istilted. In such case, adjust the tray and paper feedroller shaft so that they may be parallel in eachother. Whenever the wire is replaced, this adjust-ment must be implemented.

A. Procedure1. Remove the LT from the main body.2. Open the top cover and remove the right cover

and the front cover.3. Loosen a screw[2] of the wire adjustment part[1]

situated in front.

[1]

[2]

1-91

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


4. Position in front and in rear the 2 metal scales[2]in the tray[1] as shown in the drawing.

5. Move the wire adjustment part[3] until the dis-tance from top of the side plate to the tray[1] topface is equal in both the front and back sides.

6. When the adjustment is complete, tighten thescrew[4] for the wire adjustment part[3].

[3]

[2]

[1]

[4]

1-92

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


9.8 FS-113 Output Check Mode

A. Switches on PWB

S1 Used to run the Test Mode opera-tion.S2

S3 DIP switch used to set the Test Mode operation.

LED1~4 Turn ON or OFF, or blink to indi-cate a specific condition during Test Mode operations.

S1

S2

S3

1-93

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


B. Test Mode(1) Test Mode Setting Procedurea. Procedure1. Turn OFF SW2 (Sub power switch) of the

copier.2. Flip keys of the DIP switch into the ON or OFF

position as necessary. (See Table below.)3. Turn ON SW2 (Sub power switch) of the copier.4. This sets the Finisher into the corresponding

Test Mode operation.

b. Resetting Procedure• Flip all keys of the DIP switch to their respective

initial positions (OFF positions) and turn OFF,then ON, SW2 (Sub power switch) of the copier.

(2) Test Mode Operations

Test Mode Operation

DIP Switch (S3) LED1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Online1st Tray exit ONElevator Tray exit

ON

Finisher Tray exit

ON ON

Shifting operation

ON ON

Aligning Plate operation

ON ON

Stapling Unit CD movement

ON ON ON

Exit Roller/Rolls spacing

ON

Storage Roller/Rolls spacing

ON ON

Elevator Tray operation

ON ON

Hole Punch operation

ON ON ON

Hole position selection

ON ON

Sensor testON ON ON

Indicates sen-sor state

: Blinking : OFF

1-94

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


(3) Operation in Each Test Mode Operationa. 1st Tray Exit

b. Elevator Tray Exit

c. Finisher Tray Exit

d. Shifting Operation

Motors and solenoids: Energized [Entrance Motor (M1), Upper Entrance Motor(M4), Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Sole-noid (SL1), 1st Tray Entrance Selecting Sole-noid (SL2)]

Motors and solenoids: Deenergized [Entrance Motor (M1), Upper Entrance Motor(M4), Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Sole-noid (SL1), 1st Tray Entrance Selecting Sole-noid (SL2)]

S1: ON

S2: ON

S1: ON

S2: OFF

Motors: Energized [Entrance Motor (M1), Upper Entrance Motor(M4), Lower Entrance Motor (M2), Exit Motor(M3)]

Motors: Deenergized [Entrance Motor (M1), Upper Entrance Motor(M4), Lower Entrance Motor (M2), Exit Motor(M3)]

S1: ON

S2: OFF

Motors and solenoids: Energized [Entrance Motor (M1), Upper Entrance Motor(M4), Lower Entrance Motor (M2), Exit Motor(M3), Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Sole-noid (SL1)]

Motors and solenoids: Deenergized [Entrance Motor (M1), Upper Entrance Motor(M4), Lower Entrance Motor (M2), Exit Motor(M3), Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Sole-noid (SL1)]

S1: ON

S2: ON

The Elevator Tray shifts to the front.

The Elevator Tray shifts to the rear.

1-95

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


e. Aligning Plate Operation

f. Stapling Unit CD Movement

g. Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing

h. Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing

S1: ON

S1: ON

At the home position

At a position to align A4 paper

S1: ON

At a position to align 8.5 x 11R paper

S1: ON

At a position to align 8.5 x 11 paper

S1: ON

At a position to align A4R paper

S1: ON

S1: ON

At home position

At a position for A4 corner stapling

S1: ON

At a position for A4R corner stapling

S1: ON

At home position

S1: ON

S2: ON

Pressed

Separated

S1: ON

S2: ON

Pressed

Separated

1-96

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


i. Elevator Tray Operation

j. Hole Punch Operation

k. Hole Position Selection U.S.A. and Canada

l. Sensor Test

Sensor State LED1 2 3 4

Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D)

Unblocked

Storage Sensor (PC3) BlockedLower Entrance Sensor (PC2)

Blocked

Upper Entrance Sensor (PC4)

Blocked

: ON : OFF

S1: ON

S2: ON

Goes up until the Elevator Tray Upper LimitSensor PQ (PWB-D) is blocked.

Goes down until the Elevator Tray Upper LimitSensor PQ (PWB-D) is unblocked.

S1: ON

S1: ON

The Punch Motor (M11) is energized.

The electromagnetic spring clutch is energized.

S2: ON

The Punch Motor (M11) is deenergized.

S1: ON

S2: ON

2-hole position

3-hole position

1-97

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


9.9 Lengthwise position adjust-ment of punch hole of FS-113

A. Procedure1. Set the copier into the Hole Punch mode and

make a 1-sided copy from a 1-sided original.2. Fold the copy in half and check to see if the

holes are aligned (deviation should be within 2mm).

3. If the holes are misaligned, loosen the screwthat secure the Punch Unit and slide the PunchUnit as necessary.

4. Make a copy again and check for correct holepositions.

1-98

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


9.10 Adjustment of FS-113 Sole-noids

A. Adjustment of the Upper/Lower EntranceSwitching Solenoid (SL1)

(1) Procedure1. Loosen one screw that secures the solenoid in

position.2. Move the solenoid up or down and, when

dimension A measures 4.4mm, tighten thescrew.

B. Adjustment of the 1st Tray Entrance Select-ing Solenoid (SL2)

(1) Procedure1. Loosen one screw that secures the solenoid in

position.2. Move the solenoid to the right or left and, when

dimension B measures 3.6mm, tighten thescrew.

1-99

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


9.11 FS-113 Timing Belt TensionAdjustment

A. Adjustment of the Upper Entrance Motor(M4) Timing Belt

(1) Procedure1. Loosen 2 screws.2. Use a spring balance to apply pressure at C and

tighten the 2 screws at the position where thetension becomes 200 ± 100gf when the beltdeflects 4mm.

B. Adjustment of the Lower Entrance Motor(M2) Timing Belt

(1) Procedure1. Loosen 2 screws.2. Use a spring balance to pull the square hole[2]

given in the lower entrance motor mountingbracket with a force of 800 ± 50gf and tightenthe 2 screws.

C. Adjustment of the Exit Motor (M3) TimingBelt

(1) Procedure1. Loosen 3 screws.2. Tighten the 3 screws at the position[3] where the

external form of the screw[1] coincides with thatof the oblong hole in the exit motor mountingbracket[3].

[1]

[2]

[1]

[2]

[3]

1-100

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


9.12 FS-113 Adjustment of theElevator Tray Upper LimitSensor

• This adjustment must be made when the ControlBoard (PWB-A) or the Elevate Tray Top FaceSensor (PWB-C, D) is replaced with a new one.

A. Procedure1. Set up the sensor test mode.2. Turn VR1 on PWB-A fully counterclockwise.3. Using a sheet of paper, block the Elevator Tray

Upper Limit Sensor LED (PWB-C).4. Check that LED4 on PWB-A turns OFF. If it

stays ON, slowly turn VR1 clockwise and stopturning it as soon as the LED turns OFF.

1-101

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


9.13 Adjustment of FS-113 Eleva-tor Tray Overload DetectionLevel

• This adjustment must be made when the ControlBoard (PWB-A) or the Elevator Motor (M7) isreplaced with a new one.

A. Procedure1. Set the “Elevator Tray operation” function of the

Test Mode.2. Turn VR2 on PWB-A fully counterclockwise.3. Using a sheet of paper, block the Elevator Tray

Upper Limit Sensor LED (PWB-C). Then usingthe “Elevator Tray operation” function, lower theElevator Tray.

4. Place 1,500 sheets of A3 (80g/m2) or 3,000sheets of A4 (80g/m2) paper on the ElevatorTray.

5. Using the “Elevator Tray operation” function,raise the Elevator Tray.

6. While the Elevator Tray is going up, turn VR2 onPWB-A clockwise and, when LED3 on PWB-Aturns from a steady light to off, stop turning VR2.

1-102

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


9.14 Staple Position Adjustmentof FS-114

• It is replaced when the stapler is replaced orwhen the staple position is not correct.

A. Procedure1. Set the staple mode and make a copy.2. Check the staple position of the paper.

• 1-Point Tilted StaplePaper Width 279 to 297mm: 45° tilt

B5, B4: 30° tilt

• 1-Point Parallel StaplePaper Width 182 to 216mm

Measurement position

Specification Adjustment range

A, D 4.4 ± 3mm —B, C 12.1 ± 4mm +1mm to -2mm



A 4.9 ± 3mm —B 16.2 ± 4mm +1mm to -2mmC 10.1 ± 4mm +1mm to -2mmD 6.5 ± 3mm —



A 4.5 ± 3mm —B 6.0 ± 4mm +1mm to -2mm

A

B

C

D

4349D503AA

A

B

4349D504AA

1-103 1

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


1

• 2-Point Staple

Y = (paper width-x-11) / 2X = A3, A4: 137

B4, B5: 114A4R: 190B5R: 162

Substitute above into the equation.

3. If the staple position is misaligned, remove onescrew and the cover.

4. Loosen two adjustment screws and move theStapler Unit in the direction of the arrow to makethe adjustment.

5. Make another copy and check the staple posi-tion.

9.15 Adjustment of the Installa-tion Position of the ShutterDrive Gear of FS-114

• When the gear/1, 2 or 3 is replaced, or the gear/1, 2 or 3 is removed.

A. Procedure1. Set three gears.

Note:• Set the gears so that the marks on Gears 1 and 3

are aligned with the rib of Gear 2 as shown on theright.



C, F 6.0 ± 4mm +1mm to -2mmD Y ± 4mm —E X ± 4mm —

4349D505AA

C

D

E

F

4349D513AA

4349D502AA

Gear 1

Gear 2

Gear 3

1-104

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


9.16 Punch Hole Deviance Adjust-ment of FS-114 (PK-114)

• When the punch kit is replaced or removed.

A. Procedure1. Set the copier into the Hole Punch mode and

make a 1-sided copy from a 1-sided original.2. Fold the output paper in half and check whether

the punch hole positions are aligned.Specification: Within 2mm

3. If the punch hole position is misaligned, removetwo screws and the cover.

4. Loosen one adjustment screw and move thePunch Unit forward or backward to make theadjustment.

5. Make another copy and check the punch holeposition.

4349D501AA

4512U025AB

1-105 1

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


1

9.17 Fold Angle Adjustment ofSK-114

• It is performed when the fold unit is replaced or atilt occurs in paper folding.

A. Procedure1. Enter the Crease mode and make a copy. (A3

Size)2. Fold the output paper and half and check

whether section A of the paper is aligned.Specification: 0 ± 1.5mm

3. If the fold position is slanted as shown on theleft, make the following adjustment.

4. Open the Front Door, loosen one adjustmentscrew, and move the Crease Unit to the left tomake the adjustment.

* If the fold position is slanted opposite to thefigure of step 3, move the Crease Unit to theright to make the adjustment.

5. Make another copy and check the fold position.

A

4511D529AA

Center

Fold

4511D530AA

1-106

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


9.18 Staple Angle Adjustment ofSK-114

• It is performed when the staple unit 1 or 2 isreplaced or a tilt occurs in center staple position.

A. Procedure1. Set five A4 originals in the ADF.2. Set to 2-point Staple and Crease mode and

make a copy. Check whether the staple positionis aligned correctly.Specification: 0 ± 1.5mm

3. If the staple position is slanted as shown on thefigure, make the following adjustment.

4. Release the lock release lever of the SaddleUnit.

5. Loosen one adjustment screw and move thelock lever to the left to make the adjustment.

* If the staple position is slanted opposite to thefigure of step 3, move the lock lever to theright to make the adjustment.

6. Make another copy and check the staple posi-tion.

A

4511D531AAExit direction

4511D532AA

1-107 1

I A

DJU

STM

ENT


Blank page

1-108

II IS

W

KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003 DESCRIPTION OF THE ISW

II ISW

1. DESCRIPTION OF THE ISWThe ISW (In-system Writer) is an operation bywhich the control program, that is stored in the flashROM incorporated into a variety of control boards inKonica's digital copier, is rewritten with the boardintegrated into the main body of the copier. Execut-ing the ISW allows you to renew the version of thecontrol program without changing the board or toinstall the latest program while changing the board.As a tool to execute the ISW, you can use the [ISWTrns (PC software)] by which rewriting is made witha personal computer (PC) connected to the digitalcopier.This tools allow direct rewriting of the control pro-gram in the flash ROM included in the copier mainbody by connecting the ISW connector of the copiermain body.

The method of carrying out the necessary setupwork on the main body for executing ISW isdescribed here. For the operation of the “ISW Trns,”see the “Konica ISW (In-System Writer) ServiceHandbook.”

Note:• When using the USB on this machine for execut-

ing the ISW, it is required to install the USB driverof the ISWTrns. For the installation procedure,see the Readme file attached to the ISWTrns.

• When using the USB, be sure to turn on the USBradio button in the [Setting (S)] - [Communicationsetting (C)] of the ISWTrns and press the OK but-ton.

• For the ISW method of this machine, only theISW Trns is available.

2. SETUPA. Board used for the ISW

The following boards are available for rewritinga program using the ISW in 7145.

• SCB (System control board)• CB (Main body control board)• FNSCB (FNS control board) : FS-112• FAX control• For the printer controller, see the SHB of IP.

For boards other than the above, the ROM isrequired to be changed.

B. Data flowThere are 2 types of data flows for the ISW asshown below:

• PC→SCB→CB→FNSCB• PC→SCB→FAX

Important:• When the overall control program has not been

written into the SCB (System control board), it isnot possible to rewrite programs for other boards.

C. Checking before transferBefore executing the ISW, be sure to check tosee if the transfer case and the transfer modeto be used are correct.

(1) When the overall control program has notbeen installedWhen the overall control program has not beeninstalled, the LCD screen is not displayed anddata cannot be written in the 25 mode.Transfer case: When the SCB (System control

board) is being replaced.Transfer mode:When the power is on. (When

the data LED indicator lamp ison → The ISW is waiting fortransfer. When the lamp isflashing → The ISW is receivingdata.)

2-1

II IS

W

SETUP KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003

(2) When the overall control program has beeninstalledWhen the overall control program has beeninstalled, it is possible to write data in the 25mode.Transfer case: Version up, when boards other

than the SCB (System controlboard) are being replaced.

Transfer mode:25 mode

D. ISW connectorsThe ISW connectors are provided on the rightside of the main body, and each of the connec-tors is covered with a cap or seal. Be sure toremove this cap or seal while in use.The following two types of IF are available:

• USB (B type)• IEEE1284 (Nibble/ECP/compatible mode)

E. Preparation of the copying machine for ISWtransferBefore operating the ISW, maintain the copierin ISW mode.

(1) When the overall control program has beeninstalled

1. Enter the 25 mode.2. “25 mode menu screen”

Press the [10.ISW] key.3. “ISW menu screen”

Select the ROM where the ROM data to berewritten.[START] key is displayed.

4. “Program rewrite screen”Pressing [START] key, cause the machine to bedata waiting condition.

5. Execute the operation according to the proce-dures specified in the “Konica ISW (In-SystemWriter) Service Handbook.”

6. In about 60 seconds after the data transfer fromthe PC has been completed, the ISW data iswritten from the system memory in the SCB(System control board) into the flash ROM inwhich data is stored.

Note:• Be sure not turn off the power to the copying

machine while the ISW data is being written.

7. When data has been written into the flash ROM,the system is restarted to display the “25 modemenu screen.”

(2) When the overall control program is notinstalled

1. Turn on the SW1 (Main power switch) and theSW2 (Sub-power switch).

2. Check to see if the data LED indicator lamp ison. In this condition, the ISW is placed in waitingfor transfer. Check to see if the data LED is flashing whilethe ISW data is being received.

3. The procedure after this is the same as thesteps above for “(1) When the overall controlprogram has been installed”.

F. Data transfer errorWhen a transfer error occurs, an error mark isdisplayed in the message area on the LCD dis-play.If an error occurs, see the section “Error han-dling” in the separate “ISW Service Handbook”and perform the appropriate countermeasures.After the countermeasures are completed, per-form the re-write operation again from thebeginning.

2-2

II IS

W

KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003 SETUP

(1) ISW for image control/FNS control/FAX con-trol

1. Enter the 25 mode.2. “25 mode menu screen”

Press the [10. ISW] key.3. “ISW menu screen”

Select a ROM the data of which is rewritten. The[START] key is displayed.

4. “Program rewrite screen”Press the [START] key to put the ISW into thestate of waiting for transfer.

5. Execute the operation according to the proce-dure given in the Konica ISW (In-system Writer)Service Handbook.

6. In about 100 seconds after completion of thetransfer of data from the PC, the ISW data iswritten into the flash ROM in the ISW-intendedboard.

Note:• Do not turn off the power to the copying machine

while the ISW data is being written.

7. When the data has been written into the flashROM, a message “Completed successfully” isdisplayed.

8. Press the [RETURN] key twice to return to the“25 mode menu screen”.

2-3

II IS

W

SETUP KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003

Blank page

2-4

III S

ERVI

CE

KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003 SERVICE SCHEDULE

III SERVICE

1. SERVICE SCHEDULE

1.1 Service schedule

Guarantee period (5 years or 1,800,000 copies)

Service item x 10,000 copies Service count12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180

Main body

MaintenanceEvery 120,000 copies

14 times

Periodic check (I)Every 240,000 copies

7 times

Periodic check (II)Every 360,000 copies

4 times

Periodic check (III)Every 480,000 copies

3 times

Periodic check (IV)Every 720,000 cop-ies

2 times

DF-318 MaintenanceEvery 120,000 copies

14 times


1 time

Periodic check (II)Every 1,200,000 copies

1 time

DB-411 MaintenanceEvery 120,000 copies

14 times


7 times

DB-211 MaintenanceEvery 120,000 copies

14 times


3 times

LT-203 MaintenanceEvery 120,000 copies

14 times


7 times

3-1

III S

ERVI

CE

SERVICE SCHEDULE KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003

1

FS-112 MaintenanceEvery 120,000 copies

14 times


2 times

FS-113+RU-101 MaintenanceEvery 120,000 copies

14 times

FS-114/PK-114SK-114/BK-114

MaintenanceEvery 120,000 copies

14 times

Service item x 10,000 copies Service count12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180

3-2

III S

ERVI

CE


1.2 Maintenance items

A. Main body (Every 120,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification Service item Quantity Implementation classification Materials•Tools usedCleaning Check Lubrication Replacement

1 Preparations (1) Image check

(2) Exterior

2 Fixing unit (1) Removal of fixing unit

3 Main body (1) Suction filter /A 1

(2) Filter cover assembly 1

(3) Cooling fan /1 (FM4)Cooling fan /2 (FM7)Inlet filterDeveloping suction /F, /R

Blower brush

4 Read unit (1) Platen glass(include the slit glass)

Drum cleaner/Cleaning pad

(2) No. 1 to No. 3 mirrors Drum cleaner/Cleaning pad

5 Paper feed unit

(1) Paper feed roller Drum cleaner/Cleaning pad

(2) Feed roller Drum cleaner/Cleaning pad

(3) Double feed prevention roller


(4) Paper dust removing brush

Blower brush/Cleaning pad

6 By-pass feed unit

(1) Double feed preven-tion roller




7 Fixing unit (1) Fixing claw Drum cleaner/Cleaning pad

(2) Fixing sensor Drum cleaner/Cleaning pad

(3) Fixing thermostat Drum cleaner/Cleaning pad

(4) Fixing heat roller 1

(5) Fixing press roller 1

(6) Heat insulating sleeve /A 2 Solvest 240

(7) Heat insulating sleeve /B 1

(8) Fixing idling gear /B 1 Drum cleaner/Cleaning pad

(9) Install of fixing unit

3-3 1

III S

ERVI

CE


B. DF-318 (Every 120,000 copies/prints)

8 Final check (1) Loading of toner car-tridge

(2) Check of W.U.T

(3) Check of image adjustment

(4) Check of copy samples

(5) 25 mode PM counter resetting

(6) Peripheral and exterior of the machine


Note:• The inlet filters for the FM4/FM7 may get soiled depending on the location in which the machine is placed.

Be sure to clean it when the filter is found clogged with dust while in inspection.When cleaning is not made properly, toner packing may result due to a temperature rise inside themachine.



1 Preparations (1) Paper through check

2 Paper feed section

(1) Original registration sensor

Blower brush

(2) Original conveyance sensor

Blower brush

(3) Original size sensor/1, /2 Blower brush





(7) Read roller Water/Cleaning padNote:• Do not use

alcohol.(8) Paper dust removing

brushBlower brush

3 Final check (1) Paper through check

(2) Exterior cleaning Drum cleaner/Cleaning pad

3-4

III S

ERVI

CE


C. DB-211/411 (Every 120,000 copies/prints)

D. LT-203 (Every 120,000 copies/prints)

E. FS-112 (Every 120,000 copies/prints)





















2 Conveyance section

(1) Conveyance drive roller /A


(2) Papaer exit drive roller Drum cleaner/Cleaning pad



3-5

III S

ERVI

CE


1

F. FS-113/RU-101 (Every 120,000 copies/prints)

G. FS-114 (Every 120,000 copies/prints)

H. PK-114 (Every 120,000 copies/prints)

I. SK-114 (Every 120,000 copies/prints)



2 FS-113 (1) Each of conveyance rollers


(2) Paddle Drum cleaner/Cleaning pad

(3) Punch scraps box section

Cleaning pad

3 RU-101 (1) Each of conveyance rollers

(2) Exterior






(2) Each of conveyance rollers


3 Alignment section

(1) Paddle Drum cleaner/Cleaning pad







2 Punch scraps box

(2) Cleaning the punch scraps box





2 Exterior section


3-6

III S

ERVI

CE


J. BK-114 (Every 120,000 copies/prints)


1 Tray (1) Tray stack surface Drum cleaner/Cleaning pad

3-7 1

III S

ERVI

CE


1.3 Periodic check items (main body)

A. Periodic check (I) (Every 240,000 copies/prints)


1 Drum unit (1) Drum 1 Setting powder

(2) Cleaning blade assembly26TA-209∗

1

(3) 25 mode or 36 modePhotosensitive counter reset

2 Charging corona unit

(1) Charging corona wire Cotton swab

(2) Changing control plate Cleaning pad

3 Transfer/separation corona unit

(1) Discharge wire Cotton swab (2 pcs.: 1 for each of transfer and separation)

4 Develop-ing unit

(1) DeveloperDeveloping unit installing

1

(2) 36 mode L detection adjustment

5 Main body (1) Ozone filter40LA1017∗

1

6 Fixing unit (1) Fixing web40LA-540∗

1

(2) Fixing claw26NA5427∗

6

(3) Fixing bearing /U26NA5371∗

2

(4) Fixing bearing /L26NA5359∗

2

7 Final check (1) 25 mode or 36 modeFixing counter reset

(2) 36 mode LD1 offset adjustment

(3) 36 mode LD2 offset adjustment

(4) Check of image adjustment

3-8

III S

ERVI

CE


B. Periodic check (II) (Every 360,000 copies/prints)

C. Periodic check (III) (Every 480,000 copies/prints)

D. Periodic check (IV) (Every 720,000 copies/prints)


1 By-pass feed(Paper feed section)

(1) Double feed prevention roller40AA-406∗

1 Actual durable count : 100,000

(2) Paper feed roller26NA-428∗


(3) Feed roller40AA-425∗



1 Main body paper feed unit

(1) Paper feed rubber40LA4009∗


(2) Feed rubber26NA4011∗


(3) Double feed prevention rubber26NA4012∗


2 Transfer/separation corona unit

(1) Transfer corona unit40LA-260∗

1

3 Fixing unit (1) Fixing sensor assembly40LA-534∗

1

(2) Fuse mounting plate SP00-0110

1

(3) Fixing heater lamp /140LA8302∗

1

(4) Fixing heater lamp /240LA8303∗

1


1 Develop-ing unit

(1) Developing unit (Unit without developer)40LA-300∗

1

2 Drum unit (1) Drum unit (Unit with-out drum)40LA-990∗

1

3-9 1

III S

ERVI

CE


1

1.4 Periodic check items (DF-318)


B. Periodic check (II) (Every 1,200,000 copies/prints)

1.5 Periodic check items (DB-211)


1.6 Periodic check items (DB-411)




(1) Feed rubber12QV4034∗


(2) Double feed prevention roller13GL-405∗




(1) Paper feed roller 13GL4011∗




(1) Paper feed rubber40LA4009∗








(1) Paper feed rubber26NA4009∗






3-10

III S

ERVI

CE


1.7 Periodic check items (LT-203)


1.8 Periodic check items (FS-112)




(1) Paper feed rubber26NA4009∗




(3) Double feed prevention rubber 26NA4012∗



1 Exit section (1) Paper exit roller /A13GQ4519∗


3-11

III S

ERVI

CE


1

1.9 Replacement parts list

No. Unit Parts name Parts No. Quantity Actual durable count

01 DC (including changing corona unit)

Drum — 1 240,00002 Cleaning blade assembly 26TA-209∗ 1 240,00003 Drum unit 40LA-990∗ 1 720,00004 Transfer/separation

coronaTransfer/separation corona unit 40LA-260∗ 1 480,000

05 Developing unit Developer — 1 240,00006 Developing unit 40LA-300∗ 1 720,00007 Main body Ozone filter 40LA1017∗ 1 240,00040 Suction filter /A 40LA-318∗ 1 120,00041 Filter cover assembly 40LA-314∗ 1 120,00008 Main body paper feed

unit(Tray 1) Paper feed rubber 40LA4009∗ 1 200,000

09 (Tray 1) Feed rubber 26NA4011∗ 1 200,00010 (Tray 1) Double feed prevention

rubber26NA4012∗ 1 200,000

11 (Tray 2) Paper feed rubber 40LA4009∗ 1 200,00012 (Tray 2) Feed rubber 26NA4011∗ 1 200,00013 (Tray 2) Double feed prevention

rubber26NA4012∗ 1 200,000

14 DB-211/411 (Tray 3) Paper feed rubber (DB-411) 26NA4009∗ 1 200,000(Tray 3) Paper feed rubber (DB-211) 40LA4009∗ 1 200,000

15 (Tray 3) Feed rubber 26NA4011∗ 1 200,00016 (Tray 3) Double feed prevention

rubber26NA4012∗ 1 200,000

17 DB-211 (Tray 4) Paper feed rubber 40LA4009∗ 1 200,00018 (Tray 4) Feed rubber 26NA4011∗ 1 200,00019 (Tray 4) Double feed prevention

rubber26NA4012∗ 1 200,000

20 By-pass feed unit Double feed prevention roller 40AA-406∗ 1 100,00021 Paper feed roller 26NA-428∗ 1 100,00022 Feed roller 40AA-425∗ 1 100,00023 Fixing unit Fixing heat roller 40LA5303∗ 1 120,00024 Fixing pressure roller 40LA5304∗ 1 120,00025 Fixing cleaner assembly 40LA-540∗ 1 240,00026 Heat insulating sleeve /A 26NA5372∗ 2 120,00027 Heat insulating sleeve /B 26NA5373∗ 1 120,00028 Fixing idling gear /B 40LA5394∗ 1 120,00030 Fixing claw 26NA5427∗ 6 240,00031 Fixing bearing /U 26NA5371∗ 2 240,00032 Fixing bearing /L 26NA5359∗ 2 240,000

3-12

III S

ERVI

CE


1.10 Important maintenance parts

• The important parts specified by Konica in orderto maintain safety of the products are referred toas “important maintenance parts”. The importantmaintenance parts for this machine are asdescribed below:

Note:• “SP” is indicated in front of the parts number of

the important maintenance part. Exercise carewhen installing the parts according to “III. Direc-tions for disassembly and assembly” in this man-ual.

33 Fixing unit Fixing sensor assembly 40LA-534∗ 1 480,00034 Fuse holder SP00-0110 1 480,00035 Fixing heater lamp /1 40LA8302∗ 1 480,00036 Fixing heater lamp /2 40LA8303∗ 1 480,00037 DF-318 Paper feed roller 13GL4011∗ 1 300,00045 Feed rubber 12QV4034∗ 1 250,00038 Double feed prevention roller 13GL-405∗ 1 250,00039 FS-112 Paper exit roller /A 13GQ4519∗ 1 600,00042 LT-203 Paper feed rubber 26NA4009∗ 1 200,00043 Feed rubber 40LA4011∗ 1 200,00044 Double feed prevention rubber 26NA4012∗ 1 200,000

No. Unit Parts name Parts No. Quantity Actual durable count

No. Unit Parts name Parts No. Quantity1 Fixing unit Fuse mounting

plate assemblySP00-0110 1

3-13

III S

ERVI

CE

1 PM PARTS KIT KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003

1

2. 1 PM PARTS KIT120,000 copies/kit

Name Parts No. Quantity

Fixing heat roller 40LA5303∗ 1

Fixing press roller 40LA5304∗ 1

Heat insulating sleeve /A 26NA5372∗ 2

Heat insulating sleeve /B 26NA5373∗ 1

Fixing idling gear /B 40LA5394∗ 1

Suction filter /A 40LA-318∗ 1

Filter cover assembly 40LA-314∗ 1

Dust bag — 1

Cleaning pad (10 pcs.) — 1

Cotton swabs (4 pcs.) — 1

3-14

III S

ERVI

CE

KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003 SERVICE MATERIALS LIST

3. SERVICE MATERIALS LIST

Material No. Name Shape Remark00V-16-0 Drum cleaner 200ml

000V-19-0 Setting powder 25g

000V-18-1 Cleaning pad 10pcs/1pack

00GR00210 Solvest 240

3-15

III S

ERVI

CE

CE TOOLS LIST KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003

1

4. CE TOOLS LISTTool No. Name Shape Quantity Remark

26NA21340 Drum rotation material 1 Mounted on the drum unit.

26NAJG011 Mirror positioning jig 2

00VD-5000 New pyramid chart 1

120A9711∗ Adjustment chart 1 For DF-318 adjustment

120A9712∗ White chart 1 For DF-318 adjustment

00VC-2-00 Drum cover 1

00VD-1000 Blower brush 1

00VE-1003 Tester 1

14GS46310 Stapler unit position-ing jig

1 For SK-114 staple adjust-ment

3-16

KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003 PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING

IV D

IAG

RA

MS

IV DIAGRAMS

1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING

1.1 7145 parts layout drawing

A. Switches and sensors

(1) Main body rear side

[1] TLD (Toner level sensor) [3] PS12 (Tray set sensor /L)[2] PS9 (Tray set sensor /U)

[1]

[2]

[3]

4-1

PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003

IV D

IAG

RA

MS

(2) By-pass tray/Developing unit

(3) Fixing unit

[1] TDS (Toner density sensor) [3] PS13 (By-pass tray no paper sensor)[2] VR1 (By-pass tray paper size sensor VR) [4] PS20 (By-pass tray paper size sensor)

[1] TH2 (Fxing temperature sensor /2) [3] TS (Thermostat)[2] TH1 (Fxing temperature sensor /1) [4] PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)

[1]

[4]

[2][3]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

4-2


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

(4) Scanner section/Operation section

[1] SW2 (Sub power switch) [3] PS17 (APS sensor)[2] PS14 (Scanner home position sensor) [4] PS15 (APS timing sensor)

[2]

[3][1]

[4]

4-3


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

(5) Main body right side (Paper feed section/ADU)

[1] PS4 (ADU sensor) [5] PS22 (Timing sensor /L)[2] PS8 (No paper sensor /U) [6] PS10 (Upper limit sensor /L)[3] PS11 (No paper sensor /L) [7] PS21 (Timing sensor /U)[4] PS1 (Registration sensor) [8] PS7 (Upper limit sensor /U)

[1][2][3][4]

[5]

[6][7]

[8]

4-4


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

(6) Main body front side/Main body left side

[1] SW3 (Interlock switch) [3] HUM1 (Humidity sensor)[2] SW1 (Main power switch) [4] PS5 (Toner bottle sensor)

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

4-5


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

B. Loads


[1] M4 (Toner supply motor 1) [10] SD2 (1st paper feed solenoid /L)[2] M10 (Toner supply motor 2) [11] M9 (Paper feed motor)[3] SD9 (Toner solenoid) [12] MC2 (Loop clutch)[4] FM7 (Internal cooling fan /2) [13] SD1 (1st paper feed solenoid /U)[5] M3 (Developing motor) [14] MC1 (Registration clutch)[6] FM1 (DC power supply cooling fan) [15] M1 (Main motor)[7] M7 (Tray motor /U) [16] SD5 (ADU gate solenoid)[8] M8 (Tray motor /L) [17] M11 (Fixing motor)[9] M6 (ADU motor) [18] M2 (Scanner motor)

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4][5]

[6][7]

[8][9]

[10]

[11]

[12]

[13][14]

[15]

[16]

[17]

[18]

4-6


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

(2) Main body right side (Paper feed section/ADU)

(3) Write unit

[1] FM3 (Internal dehumidifying fan /1) [4] TSL (Transfer synchronization lamp)[2] SD4 (Cleaning web solenoid) [5] FM6 (Internal dehumidifying fan /2)[3] SD3 (By-pass feed solenoid)

[1] M5 (Polygon motor)

[1]

[5]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[1]

4-7


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

(4) Drum unit/Fixing unit

[1] L2 (Fixing heater lamp /1) [3] PCL (Pre-charging exposure lamp)[2] L3 (Fixing heater lamp /2) [4] SD7 (Separation claw solenoid)

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

4-8


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

(5) Operation section/Scanner section

[1] PTC (Heater) : Option of the service parts setting

[3][4]

FM5 (Developing suction fan)FM2 (Fixing cooling fan)

[2] FM4 (Internal cooling fan /1)

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

4-9


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

C. PCBs and others


[1] CB (Main body control board) [6] SCB (System control board)[2] FCB (Fixing control board) : only 220V system [7] PRMB (Parameter memory board)[3] CBR2 (Circuit breaker /2) [8] INV1 (Exposure lamp inverter)[4] CBR1 (Circuit breaker /1) [9] SCDB (Scanner drive board)[5] DCPS (DC power supply)

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8] [9]

4-10


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

(2) Operation section/Scanner section

(3) Main body front side

[1] TC (Total counter) [5] LCDB (Display board)[2] KC (Key counter) [6] PAKB (Panel key board)[3] OB (Operation board) [7] PSW2B (Power SW2 board)[4] INV2 (Display inverter) [8] L1INVB (Exposure lamp power supply board)

[1] PFDB /U (Paper feed detection board /U) [3] HV (High voltage power)[2] PFDB /L (Paper feed detection board /L)

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[3]

[1]

[2]

4-11


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

(4) Write unit/Drum unit

[1] TCSB (Toner control sensor board) [3] LDB (LD drive board)[2] INDEX (Index sensor board)

[3]

[2]

[1]

4-12


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

1.2 DF-318 parts layout drawing

[1] PS301 (Original no paper sensor) [4] SD302 (Roller pressure solenoid)[2] SD301 (Paper exit solenoid) [5] PS304 (Cover open/close sensor)[3] PS303 (DF open/close sensor)

[1] PS308 (Original registration sensor) [5] VR301 (Original size VR)[2] SD303 (Stamp solenoid) [6] PS305 (Original size sensor/1)[3] PS309 (Original conveyance sensor) [7] PS306 (Original size sensor/2)[4] PS302 (Original exit sensor)

[1]

[2][3]

[4][5]

[1][3][2]

[4]

[5][6]

[7]

4-13


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

1.3 DB-211 parts layout drawing

[1] M301 (Original feed motor) [4] FM301 (Cooling fan)[2] M303 (Original reverse motor) [5] DFDB (DF drive board)[3] M302 (Original conveyance motor)

[1] PS103 (No paper sensor /3) [6] PSDTB/3 (Paper size detection board /3)[2][3]

PS108 (No paper sensor /4)PS105 (Paper feed sensor /L)

[7] HTR100 (Heater) : Option of the service parts setting

[4] PS107 (Tray upper limit sensor /4) [8] PS102 (Tray upper limit sensor /3)[5] PSDTB/4 (Paper size detection board /4) [9] PS104 (Paper feed sensor /U)

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[2]

[3][4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[1]

4-14


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

1.4 DB-411 parts layout drawing

[1] PS106 (Tray sensor /4) [5] M101 (Tray up drive motor /3)[2] DBDB (DB drive board) [6] M100 (DB feed motor)[3] SD102 (Paper feed solenoid /L) [7] SD101 (Paper feed solenoid /U)[4] M102 (Tray up drive motor /4) [8] PS101 (Tray sensor /3)

[1] PS103 (No paper sensor /3) [4] PSDTB/3 (Paper size detection board /3)[2][3]

PS104 (Paper feed sensor /U)PS105 (Paper feed sensor /L)

[5] HTR100 (Heater) : Option of the service parts setting

[6] PS102 (Tray upper limit sensor /3)

[2]

[3][4]

[5]

[6]

[7] [8][1]

[2][3]

[4]

[5]

[6][1]

4-15


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

1.5 LT-203 parts layout drawing

[1] PS109 (Remaining paper sensor) [4] M101 (Tray up drive motor /3)[2] PS101 (Tray sensor /3) [5] SD101 (Paper feed solenoid /U)[3] M100 (DB feed motor) [6] DBDB (DB drive board)

[1] LTDB (LT drive board) [6] SD151 (LT paper feed solenoid)[2] SW151 (Interlock switch) [7] PS153 (No paper sensor)[3] PS154 (Remaining paper sensor /1) [8] PS155 (Paper feed sensor)[4] PS151 (Remaining paper sensor /2) [9] PS152 (Tray upper limit sensor)[5] HTR150 (Heater) : Option of the service

parts setting[10][11]

M151 (Tray up drive motor)M150 (LT paper feed motor)

[1][2]

[3]

[4]

[5] [6]

[1][2]

[3]

[4]

[5][6]

[7]

[8] [9] [10] [11]

4-16


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

1.6 FS-112 parts layout drawing

[1] M706 (Tray up/down motor) [4] PS703 (Paper exit sensor)[2] PS706 (Tray lower limit sensor) [5] PS704 (Paper exit full sensor)[3] PS716 (Tray count sensor) [6] PS711 (Tray upper limit sensor)

[1] PS710 (Alignment HP sensor /F) [4] PS709 (Alignment HP sensor /R)[2] M704 (Alignment motor /F) [5] PS707 (No paper sensor)[3] M703 (Alignment motor /R)

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

4-17


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

[1] PS708 (Stapler unit HP sensor) [2] M705 (Stapler movement motor)

[1] MS701 (Front door switch) [2] FNSCS (FNS control board)

[1] M707 (Paper pressure motor) [6] M702 (Paper exit motor)[2] MS702 (Shutter switch) [7] M701 (FNS conveyance motor)[3] PS705 (Shutter sensor) [8] FM701 (Cooling fan)[4] PS701 (Paper pressure sensor) [9] SD701 (Roller release solenoid)[5] PS702 (FNS entrance sensor)

[1]

[2]

[2][1]

[9]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5] [6][7]

[8]

4-18


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

1.7 RU-101 parts layout drawing

[1] M708 (Stapler motor) [3] PS712 (Stapler HP sensor)[2] PS713 (Staple detection sensor ) [4] PS714 (Stapler ready sensor)

[1] PS1 (Front door sensor) [3] FUB (Fuse board)[2] PS2 (Paper exit sensor)

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[2][1]

[3]

4-19


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

1.8 IT-101 parts layout drawing

[1] PS25 (IT door sensor) [3] PS24 (IT paper exit sensor /L)[2] SD8 (Gate solenoid) [4] PS23 (IT paper exit sensor /U)

[1][2]

[3] [4]

4-20

KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

IV D

IAG

RA

MS

2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

2.1 7145 connector layout drawing

A. Main body control board

B. System control board

29 (W: 32 pin)

38 (W: 9 pin)

35 (W: 5 pin)

27 (W: 8 pin)

20 (W: 4 pin)

21 (W: 6 pin)

22 (W: 5 pin)

40 (W: 4 pin)

15 (W: 24 pin)39 (W: 4 pin)

25 (W: 36 pin)26 (W: 34 pin)

19 (W: 9 pin)

2 (BK: 68 pin)

24 (W: 40 pin)

42 (W: 8 pin)

1 (W: 8 pin)

18 (W: 14 pin)

16 (W: 15 pin)

28 (W: 22 pin)

23 (GY: 22 pin)

37 (W: 8 pin)

36 (W: 10 pin)41 (W: 11 pin)

17 (W: 36 pin)

34 (W: 24 pin) 431 (W: 5 pin)

500 (W: 4 pin)

33 (BK: 24 pin)32 (BK: 20 pin)

44 (W: 22 pin)

31 (W: 7 pin)

803 (W: 5 pin)

37 (BK: 120 pin)

432 (W: 24 pin)

35 (W: 144 pin)

42 (W: 9 pin)

38 (BK: 100 pin)

502 (W: 3 pin)40 (W: 36 pin)

41 (W: 8 pin)

39 (W: 9 pin)

45 (W: 4 pin)

501 (BK: 44 pin)800 (BK: 16 pin)

47 (W: 2 pin)

46 (W: 50 pin)

4-21

CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003

IV D

IAG

RA

MS

C. High voltage power

D. DC power supply

E. A/D conversion board

F. Scanner drive board

70 (W: 9 pin)72 (W: 3 pin)

71 (W: 12 pin)

1 (W: 5 pin)

2 (W: 7 pin)

3 (W: 5 pin)

7 (W: 26 pin)

8 (W: 4 pin)

5 (W: 4 pin)

6 (W: 20 pin)

10 (W: 3 pin)

60 (W: 50 pin)

64 (W: 9 pin)

61 (W: 15 pin)

60 (W: 5 pin)

63 (W: 4 pin)62 (W: 3 pin)

4-22


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

G. Operation board

H. LD drive board

I. Index sensor board

J. Toner control sensor board

K. Power SW2 board

80 (W: 24 pin)

89 (W: 8 pin)

84 (W: 13 pin)

83 (W: 4 pin)

86 (W: 14 pin)

50 (W: 24 pin)

51 (W: 5 pin)

1 (W: 7 pin)

1 (W: 8 pin)

4-23


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

L. Paper size detection board /U, /L

M. Parameter memory board

N. Exposure lamp power supply board

O. Display inverter

P. Exposure lamp inverter

1 (W: 5 pin)

2 (BK: 24 pin)

1 (BK: 20 pin)

97 (W: 2 pin) 96 (W: 2 pin)

77 (W: 4 pin) 71 (W: 3 pin)

931 (W: 4 pin) 930 (W: 3 pin)

4-24


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

Q. Fixing control board (Metric size only)

2.2 DF-318 connector layout drawing

A. DF drive board

2.3 DB-211 connector layout drawing

A. DB drive board

99 (W: 4 pin)

214 (W: 28 pin)

212 (W: 7 pin)215 (W: 18 pin)216 (W: 6 pin)

213 (W: 3 pin)

211 (W: 36 pin)

100 (6 pin)

102 (11 pin)

103 (24 pin) 104 (18 pin)

101 (9 pin)

106 (19 pin)

4-25


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

B. Paper size detection board /3

C. Paper size detection board /4

2.4 DB-411 connector layout drawing

A. DB drive board

B. Paper size detection board /3

1 (5 pin)

1 (5 pin)

100 (6 pin)

102 (11 pin)

103 (24 pin)

105 (3 pin)

101 (9 pin)

106 (19 pin)

1 (5 pin)

4-26


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

2.5 LT-203 connector layout drawing

A. LT drive board

2.6 FS-112 connector layout drawing

A. FNS control board

2.7 RU-101 connector layout drawing

A. Fuse board

112 (11 pin)

110 (19 pin)

114 (3 pin)

113 (17 pin)

704 (12 pin)

702 (11 pin)713 (3 pin)710 (2 pin)708 (8 pin)

709 (12 pin)

707 (30 pin)705 (W: 6 pin) 717 (2 pin)

703 (12 pin)

706 (2 pin)

714 (15 pin)

716 (36 pin)

FNS CB

715 (30 pin)

701 (10 pin)

712(2 pin)

711 (2 pin)

3 (W: 6 pin) 4 (W: 2 pin)

F1

4-27

JAM CODE LIST KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003

IV D

IAG

RA

MS

3. JAM CODE LIST

Classification Jam Code

Causes Resulting operation

Correction

By-pass J10D

urin

g op

erat

ion PS1 (Registration sensor) failed to turn ON

within a predetermined time after SD3 (By-pass solenoid) ON.

If copying is in progress at time of jam, the copier com-pletes ejection and then stops.

Take out the paper from the bypass tray, and remove any jammed paper.

Upper tray

J11 PS1 (Registration sensor) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after SD1 (First paper feed solenoid /U) ON.

Open the ADU door, remove any jammed paper. Pull out the tray, and remove any jammed paper.

Lower tray

J12 PS1 (Registration sensor) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after SD2 (First paper feed solenoid /L) ON.

DB tray J13 PS104 (First paper feed sensor /U) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after SD101 (Paper feed solenoid /U) ON.

Open the DB con-veyance door, remove any jammed paperr. Pull out the tray, and remove any jammed paper.

J14 PS105 (First paper feed sensor /L) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after SD102 (Paper feed solenoid /L) ON.

LT-203 J15 PS155 (Paper feed sensor) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after SD151 (LT paper feed solenoid) ON.

Open the LT top cover, remove any jammed paper.

DB tray J16-1 The PS1 (Registration sensor) is not turned ON in the specified period of time after either of the PS104 (Paper feed sensor /U), the PS105 (Paper feed sensor /L) and the PS155 (Paper feed sensor) is turned ON and then turned OFF.

Open the ADU door, remove any jammed paper.

LT-203 J16-2 PS104 (Paper feed sensor/U) or PS105 (Paper feed sensor/L) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after SD151 (LT paper feed solenoid) ON.


Others J20-2 ADU door open jam SW3 (Interlock switch) went OFF during copying/printing.

Printer section stops immedi-ately.

Remove jammed paper according to message.

OthersFS-112

J20-3 FNS front door open jam MS701 (Front door) went OFF during copy-ing/printing or, came off from the main body.

OthersFS-113

J20-3 FNS front door open jam PC17 (Front door detection sensor) went OFF during copying/printing or, came off from the main body.

Others J20-4 When an emergency stop instruction is received from the system while in the system emergency stop jam print job.

4-28

KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003 JAM CODE LIST

IV D

IAG

RA

MS

OthersRU-101

J20-5

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n RU-101 front door open jam PS1 (Front door sensor) went OFF during copying/printing.


Remove jammed paper according to message.

Others J20-6 FNS shutter switch operation jam MS702 (Shutter) went ON during copying/printing.

OthersFS-113

J20-7 Top cover open jam PC18 (Top cover detection sensor) went OFF during copying/printing.

J20-8 Connecting connector coming off jamWhen the FS-113 connecting connector comes off from the main body during copy-ing/printing.

Conveyance J30 PS1 (Registration sensor) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after MC1 (Reg-istration clutch) ON.

Open the ADU door, remove any jammed paper.

J31 PS2 (Fixing exit sensor) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after MC1 (Reg-istration clutch) ON.

Fixing/Exit

J32 The PS2 (Fixing exit sensor) is not turned OFF in the specified period of time (by paper sizes) after it is turned ON.

Others J50-1 Failed to receive print request from system within a predetermined time after PS1 (Reg-istration sensor) ON.

The main body stop immedi-ately.

J50-2 “Valid” signal failed to turn ON within a pre-determined time after start of printing.

J50-3 MC1 (Registration clutch) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after start of printing.

DF-318 J61-1 The PS304 (Cover open/close sensor) is turned OFF while in operation.

The RADF stops immedi-ately.

Open the open/close cover, remove any jammed paper. Remove any jammed paper from the main body’s conveyance sec-tion.

J61-2 The PS303 (DF open/close sensor) is turned OFF while in operation.

J62-0 Original did not feed.J62-2 PS309 (Original conveyance sensor) failed

to turn ON within a predetermined time after start of refeed for single sided original.

J62-3 PS309 (Original conveyance sensor) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after start of reverse refeed for double sided origi-nal.

J62-4 PS309 (Original conveyance sensor) did not go OFF within the specified period after it went ON, during original exit.



Correction

4-29


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

1

DF-318 J62-5

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n PS309 (Original conveyance sensor) did not go OFF within the specified period after it went ON, during original reversal.

The RADF stops immedi-ately.

Open the open/close cover, remove any jammed paper. Remove any jammed paper from the main body’s conveyance sec-tion.

J63-1 PS302 (Original exit sensor) did not go ON during original exit.

J63-2 PS302 (Original exit sensor) did not go OFF within the specified period after it went ON, during original exit.

J63-3 PS308 (Original registration sensor) failed to turn OFF within a predetermined time after start of refeed for single sided original.

J63-4 PS308 (Original registration sensor) failed to turn OFF within a predetermined time after start of reverse refeed for double sided origi-nal.

J65-1

Whe

n id

ling PS308 (Original registration sensor) ON dur-

ing idling state.— Open the open/

close cover, remove any jammed paper.

J65-2 PS309 (Original conveyance sensor) ON during idling state.

Open the open/close cover and the reverse guide and remove jammed paper, if any.

J65-3 PS308 (Original registration sensor), PS309 (Original conveyance sensor) ON during idling state.

J65-8 PS302 (Original exit sensor) ON during idling state.

J65-9 PS308 (Original registration sensor), PS302 (Original exit sensor) ON during idling state.

J65-10 PS309 (Original conveyance sensor), PS302 (Original exit sensor) ON during idling state.

J65-11 PS308 (Original registration sensor), PS309 (Original conveyance sensor), PS302 (Origi-nal exit sensor) ON during idling state.

FS-112 J72-1 PS702 (FNS entrance sensor) ON during idling state.

Remove jammed paper, if any, from the FNS/main body.

FS-113RU-101

J72-1 The PS2 (Passage sensor) of RU-101 is turned ON while in idling.

Remove jammed paper, if any, from the FNS/RU/main body.

FS-114 J72-1 PC4-FN (Entrance sensor) is ON during idling.

Remove jammed paper, if any, from the FNS/main body.FS-112 J72-2 PS707 (No paper sensor) ON during idling

state.



Correction

4-30


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

FS-113 J72-2

Whe

n id

ling While in idling, either of the PC4 (Upper path

sensor), the PC2 (Lower path sensor), PC3 (Storage sensor), PC5 (Process tray paper exit sensor) and the PC1 (1st tray exit sen-sor) is ON.

— Remove jammed paper, if any, from the FNS/main body.

FS-114 J72-2 PC5-FN (Transport sensor) is ON during idling.

J72-3 PC8-FN (Storage tray detecting sensor) is ON during idling.

SK-114 J72-4 PC20-SK (Saddle exit sensor) is ON during idling.

Remove jam paper from SK/FNS if any.

FS-112 J72-16

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n PS702 (FNS entrance sensor) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after PS2 (Fixing exit sensor) ON.

The FNS/main body stop immediately.

FS-113RU-101

J72-16 After the PS2 (Fixing exit sensor) is turned ON, the PS2 (Passage sensor) of RU-101 is not turned ON.

Remove jammed paper, if any, from the FNS/RU/main body.

FS-114 J72-16 PC4-FN (Entrance sensor) does not ON after specified time from PS2(fixing exit sen-sor) ON.

Open front door and remove jammed paper if any.

FS-112 J72-17 PS707 (No paper sensor) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after PS702 (FNS entrance sensor) ON. (Straight, sort/group mode for other than small size)

Remove jammed paper, if any, from the FNS/the main body.

FS-113 J72-17 • The PS2 (Passage sensor) of RU-101 isnot turned OFF.

• After the PS2 of RU-101 is turned ON,the PC1 (1st tray exit sensor) is notturned ON. (Sort/Group)

• After the PS2 of RU-101 is turned ON,the PC4 (Upper path sensor) is notturned ON. (Staple)

• After the PS2 of RU-101 is turned ON,the PC2 (Lower path sensor) is notturned ON. (Staple/Sort/Group)

• The PC4 is not turned OFF after it isturned ON. (Staple)

• The PC2 is not turned OFF after it isturned ON. (Staple/Sort/Group)

• After the PC4 is turned ON, the PC3(Storage sensor) is not turned ON. (Sta-ple)

• After the PC2 is turned ON, the PC3 isnot turned OFF. (Staple/Sort/Group)

Pull out the FNS from the main body, and remove jammed paper, if any, from the FNS/main body.



Correction

4-31 1


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

1

FS-114 J72-17

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n PC4-FN (Entrance sensor) does not OFF after specified time from ON.


Open front door and remove jammed paper if any.PC5-FN (Transport sensor) does not ON

after specified time from PC4-FN (Entrance sensor) ON.

FS-113 J72-18 • After the PC1 (1st tray exit sensor) isturned ON, it is not turned OFF.

• After the PC3 (Storage sensor) is turnedON, it is not turned OFF.


FS-114 J72-18 PC5-FN (Transport sensor) does not OFF after specified time from ON.

Open front door and remove jammed paper if any.

FS-112 J72-19 PS702 (FNS entrance sensor) failed to turn OFF within a predetermined time after turn-ing ON. (Staple, sort/group)

Remove jammed paper, if any, from thse FNS/main body.

FS-114SK-114

J72-19 After specified time from stapling, PC8-FN (Strorage tray paper detect sensor) or PC20-SK (Saddle exit sensor) of SK-114 does not ON.

Open front door or saddle front door and remove jammed paper if any.

FS-112 J72-21 PS707 (No paper sensor) failed to turn OFF within a predetermined time after PS703 (Paper exit sensor) turning ON. (Small size staple, sort/group)

Remove jammed paper, if any, from thse FNS/main body.

FS-113 J72-21 While exiting paper after completion of sta-pling, the PC5 (Process tray paper detection sensor) is not turned OFF after it is turned ON.


FS-112 J72-23 PS707 (No paper sensor) failed to turn OFF within a predetermined time after PS703 (Paper exit sensor) turning ON. (Straight)

Remove jammed paper, if any, from the FNS/main body.

FS-114SK-114

J72-25 PC22-SK (Crease roller home position sen-sor) does not ON within specified time.

Open front door and remove jammed paper if any.FS-114

PK-114J72-43 Punch motor does not OFF after specified

time from ON.FS-112 J72-81 Staple jam M708 (Stapler motor) failed to

turn OFF within a predetermined time after turning ON. (Forward operation not com-pleted.)

Remove the jammed staple.



Correction

4-32


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

FS-113 J72-81

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n After the staple motor 1 starts forward rota-tion, the PC14 (Staple home sensor) is not turned ON in the specified period of time. Then, the staple motor 1 starts backward rotation and the PC14 is turned ON in the specified period of time.


Pull out the FNS from the main body, and remove jammed staples, if any.

FS-114 J72-81 Staple home position sensor does not ON after specified time from staple motor for-ward rotation.

Remove jammed staple, if any.

FS-113 J72-82 After the staple motor 2 starts forward rota-tion, the PC14 (Staple home sensor) is not turned ON in the specified period of time. Then, the staple motor 2 starts backward rotation and the PC14 is turned ON in the specified period of time.

Pull out the FNS from the main body, and remove jammed staples, if any.

J72-83 After the staple motors 1 and 2 start forward rotation, the PC14 (Staple home sensor) is not turned ON in the specified period of time. Then, the staple motors 1 and 2 start back-ward rotation and the PC14 is turned ON in the specified period of time.

SK-114 J72-84 Saddle staple home position sensor 1 does not ON within specified time from saddle sta-ple motor 1 forward rotation.

Remove jammed staple, if any.

J72-85 Saddle staple home position sensor 2 does not ON within specified time from saddle sta-ple motor 2.

IT-101 J75-1

Whe

n id

ling PS23 (IT exit sensor /U) or PS24 (IT exit

sensor /L) went ON during idling.— Open the IT cover,

remove any jammed paper.

J75-10

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n PS23 (IT exit sensor /U) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after PS2 (Fix-ing exit sensor) turning ON.


J75-11 PS24 (IT exit sensor /L) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after PS2 (Fix-ing exit sensor) turning ON.

J75-12 PS2 (Fixing exit) failed to turn OFF within a predetermined time after PS23 (IT exit sen-sor /U) or PS24 (IT exit sensor /L) turning ON.

J75-13 The IT door open jam PS25 (IT door sensor) went OFF during copying/printing.



Correction

4-33 1


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

Paper feed

J81

Whe

n id

ling PS1 (Registration sensor) ON during idling

state.— Open the ADU door,

remove any jammed paper.

J82 PS105 (Paper feed sensor /L) ON during idling state.

Open the DB con-veyance door, remove jammed paper. If paper is jammed in the main body: open the ADU door, remove the jammed paper.

J83 PS155 (Paper feed sensor) ON during idling state.


Paper exit

J90 PS2 (Fixing exit sensor) ON during idling state.

Open the ADU door, remove any jammed paper.ADU

conveyanceJ92

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n PS1 (Registration sensor) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after start of ADU reversal.


J97-1 PS4 (ADU sensor) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after PS2 (Fixing exit sensor) ON.

J97-2 PS4 (ADU sensor) failed to turn OFF within a predetermined time after turning ON.

J100

Whe

n id

ling PS4 (ADU sensor) ON during idling state. —



Correction

4-34

KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003 ERROR CODE LIST

IV D

IAG

RA

MS

4. ERROR CODE LIST4.1 Error code listClassification Warning

codeCauses Resulting

operationEstimated abnormal parts

Mai

n bo

dy Communication abnormalities

F10-1 Communication error at CB (Main body control board)Failure in serial communication between the SCB (System control board) and CB (Main body control board).

The main body stops immediately, and the RL1 (Main) turn OFF.

CB (Main body control board)SCB (System control board)

F10-2 Communication error at CB (Main body control board)Serial communication error to the sub CPU in the CB

CB (Main body control board)

F10-3 Communication error between the CB (Main body control board) and DBDB (DB drive board).

CB (Main body control board)DBDB (DB drive board)

F10-4 Sub-CPU A/D conversion errorTwo consecutive failures to respond to CB (Main body control board) A/D conversion request.

CB (Main body control board)

Paper feed tray abnor-malities

F18-1 Error in main body upper tray upPS10 (Upper limit sensor /L) failed to turn ON within a prede-termined time after M7 (Tray motor /U) ON.

CB (Main body control board)M7 (Tray motor /U)PS7 (Upper limit sensor /U)

F18-2 Error in main body lower tray upPS10 (Upper limit sensor /L) failed to turn ON within a prede-termined time after M8 (Tray motor /L) ON.

CB (Main body control board)M8 (Tray motor /L)PS10 (Upper limit sensor /L)

F18-3 Error in DB upper tray upPS102 (Tray upper limit sensor /3) failed to turn ON within a pre-determined time after M101 (Tray up drive motor /3) ON.

DBDB (DB drive board)M101 (Tray up drive motor /3)PS102 (Tray upper limit sen-sor /3)

F18-4 Error in DB lower tray/LCT tray upPS107 (Tray upper limit sensor /4) failed to turn ON within a pre-determined time after M102 (Tray up drive motor /4) ON.

DBDB (DB drive board)M102 (Tray up drive motor /4)PS107 (Tray upper limit sen-sor /4)

F18-5 Error in LT tray upPS152 (Tray upper limit sensor) failed to turn ON within a prede-termined time after M151 (Tray up drive motor) ON.

LTDB (LT drive board)M151 (Tray up drive motor)PS152 (Tray upper limit sen-sor)

4-35

ERROR CODE LIST KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003

IV D

IAG

RA

MS

Mai

n bo

dy Drum-area abnormalities

F22-1 Internal overheatingThe temperature at the outside of the drum reached or exceeded 58°C.


TCSB (Toner control sensor board)FM4 (Internal cooling fan /1)FM7 (Internal cooling fan /2)

F23-1 PCL connector detachedWith 24V ON and PCL OFF, the PCL EM signal was detected as [H].

PCL (Pre-charging exposure lamp) connectorCB (Main body control board)

High voltage power error

F26-1 L detection data errorWhen the L detection output is greater than 3.0V.

TDS (Toner density sensor)CB (Main body control board)

F26-2 Abnormal output from TDS (Toner density sensor)Maximum TDS output voltage failed to exceed 1.0V.

F26-3 Abnormal output from TDS (Toner density sensor)TDS output ripple voltage failed to reach 0.5V

F26-4 Toner density abnormalityIf L detection power exceeds 2.6V prior to toner out detection by the TLD (Toner level sensor), the automatic toner supply fea-ture should restore the toner den-sity. This error occurs if this feature fails to restore the density.

TLD (Toner level sensor)Toner supply unitLoad the toner bottle again

F28-1 Charging abnormalityWhen the EM signal (charge_em 1) is detected 5 times at the spec-ified intervals.

If any copying operation is being made, stop the main body after completion of paper exit. Turn the RL1 (Main) off.

Charging coronaHV (High voltage power)CB (Main body control board)

F28-2 Transfer lightning abnormalityWhen the EM signal (trans_em) is detected 3 times at the specified intervals, this phenomenon occurs 5 times in 1 job.


Transfer corona sectionHV (High voltage power)CB (Main body control board)

Classification Warning code


Estimated abnormal parts

4-36


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

Mai

n bo

dy High voltage power error

F28-3 Separation lightning abnormalityWhen the EM signal (separate_em) is detected 3 times at the specified intervals, this phenomenon occurs 5 times in 1 job.


Separation coronaHV (High voltage power)CB (Main body control board)

High fixing temperature abnormalities

F34-1 High fixing temperature abnor-mality (TH1)The TH1 (Fixing temperature sensor /1) detects a temperature over 236°C continuously for a specified period of time.

The main body stops immediately, and the RL1 (Main) turn OFF. Accep-tance of all keys is dis-abled.

TH1 (Fxing temperature sensor /1)TH2 (Fxing temperature sensor /2)L2 (Fixing heater lamp /1)L3 (Fixing heater lamp /2)CB (Main body control board)DCPS (DC power supply)

WARNING• When F34-∗∗, F35-∗∗ or

F36-∗∗ (fixing tempera-ture related abnormality)occurs, be sure to repair adefective part before set-ting the 25 DIPSW 3-1 to 0.If the 25 DIPSW 3-1 is setto 0 without repairing adefective part, this maycause a fire.

F34-2 High fixing temperature abnor-mality (TH2)The TH2 (Fixing temperature sensor /2) detects a temperature over 236°C continuously for a specified period of time.

Low fixing temperature abnormalities

F35-1 Low fixing temperature abnormal-ity (L2 burnt out)When turning on electricity to the L2 (Fixing heater lamp /1) for more than the specified period of time while in idling.

F35-2 Low fixing temperature abnormal-ity (L2 burnt out)In other than warming-up, the TH1 (Fixing temperature sensor /1) elapses for more than the specified period of time in a tem-perature below 165°C.




4-37


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

Mai

n bo

dy Low fixing temperature abnormalities

F35-3 TH1 (Fxing temperature sensor /1) low temperature abnormality• In warming up, when the tem-

perature detected by the TH1 at the start of turning on elec-tricity to the L2 (Fixing heater lamp /1) is below 160°C, the difference between the TH1 temperature at the time of turning on electricity to the L2 and the TH1 temperature after the elapse of the speci-fied period of time does not reach the specified value.

• When the temperature detected by the TH1 at the start of turning on electricity to the L2 is above 160°C, the TH1 temperature does not reach the warming-up com-pletion temperature in the specified period of time after the start of turning on electric-ity to the L2.





F35-4 Low fixing temperature abnormal-ity (L3 burnt out)When turning on electricity to the L3 (Fixing heater lamp /2) for a specified period of time during in idling.

F35-5 Low fixing temperature abnormal-ity (L3 burnt out)In other than warming up, the TH2 (Fixing temperature sensor /2) elapses for more than the specified period of time in a tem-perature below 165°C.




4-38


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

Mai

n bo


F35-6 TH2 (Fxing temperature sensor /2) low temperature abnormality• In warming up, when the tem-

perature detected by the TH2 at the start of turning on elec-tricity to the L3 (Fixing heater lamp /2) is below 160°C, the difference between the TH2 temperature at the start of turning on electricity to the L3 and the TH2 temperature after the elapse of the speci-fied period of time does not reach the specified value.

• When the temperature detected by the TH2 at the start of turning on electricity to the L3 (Fixing heater lamp /2) is above 160°C, the TH2 tem-perature does not reach the warming-up completion tem-perature in the specified period of time after the start of turning on electricity to the L3.





F35-7 Fixing heat roller wrapping jam failure (TH1)While in copying or idling, the TH1 (Fixing temperature sensor /1) detects continuously for more than 0.2 seconds a condition in which the temperature is below more than 10°C compared to the temperature before the specified period of time.

F35-8 Fixing heat roller wrapping jam failure (TH2)While in copying or idling, the TH2 (Fixing temperature sensor /2) detects continuously for more than 0.2 seconds a condition in which the temperature is below more than 10°C compared to the temperature before the specified period of time.




4-39


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

Mai

n bo


F35-9 TH1 (Fxing temperature sensor /1) contact failureIn warming up, when the temper-ature detected by the TH2 (Fixing temperature sensor /2) reaches the Ready temperature earlier than the temperature detected by the TH1, the temperature detected by the TH1 does not reach the Ready temperature in the specified period of time after the temperature detected by the TH2 reaches the Ready tempera-ture.





F35-10 TH2 (Fxing temperature sensor /2) contact failureIn warming up, when the temper-ature detected by the TH1 (Fixing temperature sensor /1) reaches the Ready temperature earlier than the temperature detected by the TH2, the temperature detected by the TH2 does not reach the Ready temperature in the specified period of time after the temperature detected by the TH1 reaches the Ready tempera-ture.

Sub CPU fix-ing sensor abnormalities

F36-1 TH1 (Fxing temperature sensor /1) high temperature abnormality(Sub CPU detection)In the sub CPU, the TH1 detects a temperature above 236°C for the specified period of time.

F36-2 TH1 (Fxing temperature sensor /1)open abnormality(Sub CPU detection)In the sub CPU, the TH1 detects a temperature from -8°C to -20°C continuously for the specified period of time.




4-40


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

Mai

n bo

dy Sub CPU fix-ing sensor abnormalities

F36-3 TH2 (Fxing temperature sensor /2) high temperature abnormality(Sub CPU detection)In the sub CPU, the TH2 detects a temperature above 236°C for the specified period of time.



F36-4 TH2 (Fxing temperature sensor /2) open abnormality(Sub CPU detection)In the sub CPU, the TH2 detects a temperature from -8°C to -20°C continuously for the specified period of time.



Scanner abnormalities

F41-1 M2 (Scanner motor) drive abnor-malityOccurs at exposure unit initial search or at return scan if PS14 (Scanner home position sensor) fails to turn ON within a predeter-mined time.

Scanner stops immediately.

M2 (Scanner motor)SCDB (Scanner drive board)CB (Main body control board)

F43-1 L1 (Exposure lamp) abnormalityAfter the L1 is turned ON, an L1 abnormality signal is detected continuously after the elapse of the specified period of time.

L1 (Exposure lamp)

Image control abnor-malities

F46-1 Laser driver abnormalityCaused by overcurrent in laser output.


Laser diodeLDB (LD drive board)

F46-8 Laser index abnormalityOccurs if index period is different from expected value.

INDEX (Index sensor board)M5 (Polygon motor)SCB (System control board)Laser route

F46-10 AOC abnormalityAOC counter overflow


ADB (A/D conversion board)L1 (Exposure lamp)INV1 (Exposure lamp inverter)SCB (System control board)Exposure unit stop position

F46-11 AGC abnormalityAGC counter overflow




4-41


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

Mai

n bo

dy Image control abnor-malities

F49-4 INDEX (Index sensor board) con-nection abnormality


INDEX (Index sensor board)SCB (System control board)

F49-6 ADB (A/D conversion board) con-nection abnormality


CCD on ADB (A/D conversion board)SCB (System control board)Flex wiring harness

Motor speed abnormalities

F51-2 M11 (Fixing motor) speed abnor-malityThe EM detection (fix_motor_em) signal has been detected 5 times at the specified intervals.


M11 (Fixing motor)CB (Main body control board)

F51-4 M3 (Developing motor) speed abnormalityThe EM detection (developing_mtr_em) signal has been detected 5 times at the specified intervals.

M3 (Developing motor)CB (Main body control board)

F51-5 M1 (Main motor) speed abnor-malityThe EM detection (drum_motor_em) signal has been detected 5 times at the specified intervals.

M1 (Main motor)CB (Main body control board)

F51-6 M5 (Polygon motor) speed abnor-malityM5 was not locked 7 sec. after starting to run.

M5 (Polygon motor)CB (Main body control board)

Fan lock abnormalities

F52-1 FM3 (Internal dehumidifying fan) abnormalityWhen the EM signal (exhaust_fan_FW_em) was detected at the specified cycle with [H] detected continuously, the fan has been judged abnor-mal in the succeeding two retries.

FM3 (Internal dehumidifying fan /1)CB (Main body control board)




4-42


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

Mai

n bo

dy Fan lock abnormalities

F52-2 FM2 (Fixing cooling fan /1) abnor-malityWhen the EM signal (fix_cooler_fan_em) was detected at the specified cycle with [H] detected continuously, the cooler has been judged abnormal at the succeeding two retries.


FM2 (Fixing cooling fan)CB (Main body control board)

F52-3 FM4 (Internal cooling) abnormal-ityWhen the EM signal (inhale_fan_em) was detected at the specified cycle with [H] detected continuously, the fan has been judged abnormal at the succeeding two retries.

FM4 (Internal cooling fan /1)CB (Main body control board)

F52-4 FM5 (Developing suction fan) abnormalityWhen the EM signal (blow_fan_em) was detected at the specified cycle with [H] detected continuously, the fan has been judged abnormal at the succeeding two retries.

FM5 (Developing suction fan)CB (Main body control board)

F52-5 FM6 (Internal dehumidifying fan /2) abnormalityWhen the EM signal (exhaust_fan_BK_em) was detected at the specified cycle with [H] detected continuously, the fan has been judged abnor-mal at the succeeding two retries.

FM6 (Internal dehumidifying fan /2)CB (Main body control board)

F52-6 Printer controller cooling fan abnormalityWhen an error status signal was sent from the printer controller.

Printer controller

F52-7 FM301 (Cooling fan) abnormalityWhen the EM signal (dffan_ld) was detected at the specified cycle with [H] detected continu-ously, the fan has been judged abnormal at the succeeding two retries.

FM301 (Cooling fan)CB (Main body control board)




4-43


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

Mai

n bo

dy Fan lock abnormalities

F52-8 FM7 (Internal cooling fan /2) abnormalityWhen the EM signal (exhaust_fan_BK_em) was detected at the specified cycle with [H] detected continuously, the fan has been judged abnor-mal at the two succeeding retries.


FM7 (Internal cooling fan /2)CB (Main body control board)

F52-9 HD-103 cooling fan abnormalityWhen a lock signal was detected while in the HDD operation.

HD-103 Cooling fanSCB (System control board)

Image control communication abnormalities

E56-1 Communication abnormality between system-control of the SCB (System control board) and engine-control of the CB (Main body control board).Occurs if SCB fails to responds when SW2 (Sub power switch) turns ON.

Engine power supply OFF

SCB (System control board)CB (Main body control board)

E56-2 Communication abnormality between system-control of the SCB (System control board) and engine-control of the CB (Main body control board).While on standby, the process Ready signal has not been detected for the specified period of time.

E56-3 Communication abnormality between system-control of the SCB (System control board) and engine-control of the CB (Main body control board).While on standby, the scanner Ready signal has not been detected for the specified period of time.




4-44


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

Mai

n bo

dy Image control communication abnormalities

E56-4 Communication abnormality between system-control of the SCB (System control board) and engine-control of the CB (Main body control board).While on standby, the FNS Ready signal has not been detected for the specified period of time.


SCB (System control board)FNSCB (FNS control board)CB (Main body control board)

E56-5 Communication abnormality between system-control of the SCB (System control board) and engine-control of the CB (Main body control board).Platen-original size notification timeout.


Operations unit control abnormalities

E56-6 Operation status errorMemory access error at copy insertion.

SCB (System control board)

E56-7 Operation management errorControl error at panel manager

E56-8 Operation drawing error 1Screen-data drawing mismatch

E56-9 Operation drawing error 2Drawing-component data error

E56-10 Operation panel communication abnormalityCommunication error with the operating section CPU

SCB (System control board)OB (Operation board)

Image control communication abnormalities

E56-12 Communication abnormality between system-control of the SCB (System control board) and engine-control of the CB (Main body control board). There is no response from the engine after a signal is sent for periodic commu-nication.


E56-13 Communication abnormality between system-control of the SCB (System control board) and engine-control of the CB (Main body control board). The destina-tion value RAM area on the engine side is unjustly rewritten.




4-45


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

1

FNS FNS

communication abnormalities(FS-112)

F70-1 FNS communication abnormalityFailure in serial communication between the CB (Main body con-trol board) and FNSCB (FNS con-trol board).


CB (Main body control board)FNSCB (FNS control board)

FS-112 F70-11 FS-112 flash-ROM abnormalityDetected checksum error in FNS flash ROM.

FNSCB (FNS control board)

FS-113 F77-1 M8 (Shift motor) drive abnormal-ity• When starting to return to the

home position, the PC10 (Shift home sensor) is not turned ON in the specified period of time after the M8 is turned ON.

• When starting to move to the shift position, the PC10 is not turned OFF in the specified period of time after the M8 is turned ON.

M8 (Shift motor)PC10 (Shift home sensor)PC11 (Shift motor pulse sensor)PWB-A (Control board)

FS-112 F77-2 • The PS711 (Tray upper limit sensor) is not turned ON in the specified period of time after the paper extractor starts to go up.

• While in copying, the PS711 is not turned ON in the speci-fied period of time after the M706 starts to go up.

• Paper is not detected even after the paper detection operation is made 3 times.

M706 (Tray up drive motor)FNSCB (FNS control board)PS711 (Tray upper limit sensor)PS706 (Tray lower limit sensor)




4-46


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

FNS FS-113 F77-2 M7 (Elevator motor) drive abnor-

mality• While the elevate tray is going

up, the PWB-F (Elevate tray top face sensor) is not turned OFF in the specified period of time after the M7 is turned ON.

• While the elevate tray is going down, the M7 is locked.

• The S2 (Elevate tray upper limit switch) or the S3 (Ele-vate tray lower limit switch) is turned ON in the specified period of time after the ele-vate tray starts to drive.


M7 (Elevator motor)PWB-A (Control board)PWB-F (Elevate tray top face sensor)S2 (Elevate tray upper limit switch)S3 (Elevate tray lower limit switch)

FS-114 F77-2 M11-FN (Elevator motor) drive failure• During tray ascending, PC14-

FN (Top face detection sen-sor) does not ON after speci-fied time from M11-FN ON.

• During tray descending, it does not reach the target position within specified time.

• During tray descending, M11-FN is locked.

M11-FN (Elevator motor)PWB-A FN (Control board)PC15-FN (Top face detection sensor)

FS-112 F77-3 M704 (Alignment motor /F) drive abnormality• The PS710 (Alignment HP

sensor /F) cannot be attained in the specified period of time after the start of the alignment plate HP search.

• The PS710 cannot be passed through in the specified period of time after the align-ment plate starts to move to the size position.

M704 (Alignment motor /F)PS710 (Alignment plate HP sensor /F)FNSCB (FNS control board)Sensor wiring harness /2Motor wiring harness /2




4-47 1


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

1

FNS FS-113 F77-3 M5 (Alignment motor ) drive

abnormality• While in search of the home

position, the PC9 (Alignment home sensor) is not turned ON in the specified period of time after the M5 is turned ON.

• When the alignment operation starts, the PC9 is not turned OFF in the specified period of time after the M5 is turned ON.


M5 (Alignment motor)PWB-A (Control board)PC9 (Alignment home sensor)

FS-114 F77-3 M4-FN (Alignment motor 1) driv-ing failure• PC6-FN (Alignment home

position sensor 1) does not ON within specified time from start of alignment plate HP searching.

• PC6-FN does not OFF within specified time from start of alignment plate home position search.

M4-FN (Alignment motor 1)PWB-A FN (Control board)PC6-FN (Alignment home position sensor 1)

FS-113 F77-4 M13 (Paper exit roller separation motor) drive abnormality• When the pressure position

drive starts, the PC13 (Paper exit roller home sensor) is not turned ON in the specified period of time after the M13 is turned ON.

• When the separation position drive starts, the PC13 is not turned OFF in the specified period of time after the M13 is turned ON.

M13 (Paper exit roller separa-tion motor)PWB-A (Control board)PC13 (Paper exit roller home sensor)




4-48


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

FNS FS-114 F77-4 M6-FN (Exit open/close motor)

drive failure• After starting pressing posi-

tion driving, PC12-FN (Exit roller home position sensor) does not ON within specified time from M6-FN ON.

• After starting separation posi-tion driving, PC12-FN does not OFF within specified time from M6-FN ON.


PWB-A FN (Control board)M6-FN (Exit open/close motor)PC12-FN (Exit roller home position sensor)

FS-112 F77-5 M707 (Paper pressure motor) drive abnormalityThe M707 does not make a turn in the specified period of time after it starts to operate.

M707 (Paper pressure motor)FNSCB (FNS control board)Sensor wiring harness /1

FS-113 F77-5 M12 (Storage roller separation motor) drive abnormality• When the pressure position

drive starts, the PC12 (Stor-age roller home sensor) is not truned on in the specified period of time after the M12 is turned ON.

• When the separation position drive starts, the PC12 is not turned ON in the specified period of time after the M12 is turned ON.

M12 (Storage roller separation motor)PWB-A (Control board)PC12 (Storage roller home sensor)

FS-112 F77-6 M705 (Stapler movement motor) abnormality• The PS708 (Stapler unit HP

sensor) is not turned ON in the specified period of time after the start of the home position search.

• The PS708 is not turned OFF in the specified period of time after the start of the move-ment to the 2-staple stand-by position.

FNSCB (FNS control board)M705 (Stapler movement motor)PS708 (Stapler unit HP sensor)Sensor wiring harness /2Motor wiring harness /1




4-49 1


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

1

FNS FS-113 F77-6 M6 (Staple movement motor)

drive abnormality• The PC14 (Staple home sen-

sor) is not turned ON in the specified period of time after the M13 is turned ON.

• The home position cannot be passed through in the speci-fied period of time after the start of the movement to the 1-staple position.


PWB-A (Control board)M6 (Staple movement motor)PC14 (Staple home sensor)

FS-114 F77-6 M7-FN (Stapling unit moving motor) driving failure• PC10-FN (Staple home posi-

tion sensor) does not ON within specified time from starting of HP search.

• PC10-FN does not OFF when starting to move to 1-position stapling position.

M7-FN (Stapling unit moving motor)PWB-A FN (Control board)PC10-FN (Staple home posi-tion sensor)

FS-112 F77-11 Stapler reversal abnormalityThe PS712 (Stapler HP sensor) cannot be attained in the speci-fied period of time after the start of the reverse rotation of the M708 (Staple motor).

FNSCB (FNS control board)M708 (Staple motor)PS712 (Stapler HP sensor)

FS-113 F77-11 Stapler /F drive abnormality• The home position cannot be

passed through in the speci-fied period of time after the start of the staple 2 /F drive.

• While in the staple 2/F drive, the home position cannot be attained in the specified period of time after the home position is turned OFF.

• The home position cannot be attained in the specified period of time after the start of the reverse drive of the staple 2/F.

PWB-A (Control board)Staple motor 2




4-50


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

FNS FS-113 F77-12 Stapler /R drive abnormality

• The home position cannot be passed through in the speci-fied period of time after the start of the staple 1/R drive.

• While in the staple 1/F drive, the home position cannot be attained in the specified period of time after the home position is turned OFF.

• The home position cannot be attained in the specified period of time after the start of the reverse drive of the staple 1/F.


PWB-A (Control board)Staple motor 1

FS-114 F77-12 Stapler drive failure• Staple motor does not move

from home position within specified time from start of staple driving.

• Staple motor does not reach the home position within specified time from start of staple reverse driving.

PWB-A FN (Control board)Staple motor

F77-13 Saddle staple 1 drive failure• During driving of saddle sta-

ple motor 1, saddle staple does not move from home position within specified time.

• During reverse driving of sad-dle staple motor 1, it does not reach the home position within specified time.

PWB-C SK (Control board)Saddle staple motor 1

F77-14 Saddle staple 2 drive failure• During saddle staple motor 2

driving, it does not move from home position.

• During reverse driving of sad-dle staple motor 2, it does not reach the home position within specified time.

PWB-C SK (Control board)Saddle staple motor 2




4-51 1


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

1

FNS FS-112 F77-16 M703 (Alignment motor /R)

abnormality• The PS709 (Alignment HP

sensor /R) cannot be attained in the specified period of time after the start of the alignment plate HP search.

• The PS709 cannot be passed through in the specified period of time after the align-ment plate starts to move to the size position.


M703 (Alignment motor /R)PS709 (Alignment HP sensor /R)FNSCB (FNS control board)Sensor wiring harness /2Motor wiring harness /1

F77-18 FM701 (Cooling fan) drive abnor-malityThe 701 detects lock for more than the specified period of time from the start of operation to the close of operation.

FM701 (Cooling fan)FNSCB (FNS control board)Motor wiring harness /2

FS-114 F77-22 M13-SK (In & out guide motor) failure• During M13-SK driving (pro-

trudes), PC23-SK (In & out guide home position sensor) does not OFF within specified time.

• During M13-SK driving (mov-ing aside), PC23-SK does not ON within specified time.ve to the size position.

PWB-C SK (Control board)M13-SK (In & out guide motor)PC23-SK (In & out guide home position sensor)

F77-23 M14-SK (Layable guide motor) failure• After M14-SK (Layable guide

motor) starts moving to the home position, PC26-SK (Layable guide home position sensor) does not ON within specified time from M14-SK ON.

• After starting of movable guide, PC26-SK (Layable guide home sensor) does not OFF within specified time from M14-SK ON.

PWB-C SK (Control board)M14-SK (Layable guide motor)PC26-SK (Layable guide home position sensor)




4-52


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

FNS FS-114 F77-24 Saddle exit roller drive failure

• PC18-SK (Saddle exit open/close motor) does not ON within specified time from press-operation starting of M9-SK (Saddle exit open/close motor) .

• PC18-SK does not OFF within specified time from M9-SK separation operation start-ing.


PWB-C SK (Control board)M9-SK (Saddle exit open/close motor)PC18-SK (Saddle exit roller home position sensor)

F77-25 M10-SK (Crease motor ) drive failureDuring M10-SK driving, PC22-SK (Crease roller home position sen-sor) does not ON within specified time.

PWB-C SK (Control board)M10-SK (Crease motor)PC22-SK (Crease roller home position sensor)

F77-26 M8-SK (Saddle exit motor) drive failure• Lock signal ON is continu-

ously detected for the speci-fied period within specified time from M8-SK drive start.

• Lock signal OFF is continu-ously detected for the speci-fied period within specified time from stopping of M8-SK drive signal.

PWB-C SK (Control board)M8-SK (Saddle exit motor)

F77-27 Shutter drive failure• During M6-FN (Exit open/

close motor) driving (closing shutter), PC16-FN (Shutter home position sensor) does not ON within specified time.

• During M6-FN driving (open-ing shutter) PC16-FN does not OFF within specified time.

6-FN (Exit open/close motor)PWB-A FN (Control board)PC16-FN (Shutter home posi-tion sensor)




4-53 1


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

1

FNS FS-114 F77-28 M5-FN (Alignment motor 2) driv-

ing failure• PC7-FN (Alignment home

position sensor 2) does not ON within specified time from starting of alignment plate home position search.

• PC7-FN does not OFF within specified time from starting of alignment plate HP search.


M5-FN (Alignment motor 2)PWB-A FN (Control board)PC7-FN (Alignment home position sensor 2)

F77-29 SL2-FN (Exit paddle solenoid) driving failure• PC11-FN (Exit paddle home

position sensor) does not ON within specified time from SL2-FN ON (paddle move aside).

• PC11-FN does not OFF within specified time from SL2-FN ON (during pressing paper).

L2-FN (Exit paddle solenoid)PWB-A FN (Control board)PC11-FN (Exit paddle home position sensor)

FS-113 F77-53 M11 (Punch motor) drive abnor-malityThe PC15 (Punch motor pulse sensor) does not change its state from OFF to ON, or ON to OFF in the specified period of time after the M11 is turned ON.

M11 (Punch motor)PC15 (Punch motor pulse sensor)

F77-54 M14 (Punch movement motor) drive abnormality (inch system only)• When starting the punch 2-

hole position switch drive, the S4 (punch hole position switch) is not turned ON in the specified period of time after the M14 is turned ON.

• When starting the punch 3-hole position switch drive, the S4 is not turned OFF in the specified period of time after the M14 is turned ON.

PWB-A FN (Control board)Punch motorPunch position sensor 1Punch position sensor 2

FS-114 F77-53 Punch motor drive failureDuring driving punch motor, punch position sensor 1,2 do not OFF within specified time.

PWB-A (Control board)M14 (Punch movement motor)S4 (Punch hole position switch)




4-54


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

Mai

n bo

dy Nonvolatile memory abnormalities

F80-1 Nonvolatile memory abnormality *1

Stop immedi-ately

PRMB (Parameter memory board)




PRMB (Parameter memory board)SCB (System control board)


PRMB (Parameter memory board)



Flash ROM abnormalities

F81-1 Flash ROM abnormalityDetected checksum error in SCB (System control board)’s FlashROM.



F81-2 Software abnormalityCB (Main body control board) and SCB (System control board) have non-matching software device types.

CB (Main body control board)SCB (System control board)

OSerror

F81-4 An OS error occurs in the image control unit in the SCB (System control board).


HD

D HDD initiali-zation abnor-mality

F82-1 A physical abnormality occurs in the HDD and a checksum abnor-mality in the DRAM occur.

SCB (System control board)HDD (Hard disk)

HDD abnor-malities

F82-2 Document manager initialization abnormality

HDD (Hard disk)Reformatting of the HDD

HDD error

F82-3 I-FAX report initializing error HDD (Hard disk)HDD reformatCB (Main control board)

Mai

n bo

dy Access abnormalities

E82-10 Document manager access abnormality (overall)The count of E82-11 to E82-17 is an overall count for E82-10.


E82-11 Document manager access abnormalityVxWorks error

E82-12 Document manager access abnormalityJob control access error

E82-13 Document manager access abnormalityImage conversion job access error




4-55 1


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

1

Mai

n bo

dy Access abnormalities

E82-14 Document manager access abnormalityFax communication job access error



E82-15 Document manager access abnormalityNet communication job access error

E82-16 Document manager access abnormalityFile storage job access error

E82-17 Document manager access abnormalityPrint job access error

E82-18 Document manager access errorFaxFile document conversion job access error

HDD error

E82-50 I-FAX report initializing error

Access error

E82-51 I-FAX report access error (overall)Job control access error 1.* In the count, E82-52 count is

also included.E82-52 I-FAX report access error

Job control access error 2

Net

wor

k Network abnormalities

F85-1 Network device abnormalityNetworkDriver has not been reg-istered for some reasoen (includ-ing hardware factors).Copier/Fax can be used.

Stop the Net-work I/O

SCB (System control board)NetWork section

F85-2 IEEE1284 device abnormalityIEEE1284 (Parallel) Driver has not been registered for some rea-sons (including hardware factors).Copier/Fax can be used.

Stop the IEEE1284 (Parallel) I/O

SCB (System control board)IEEE1284 (Parallel) section

F85-3 USB device abnormalityUSBDriver has not been regis-tered for some reasons (including hardware factors).Copier/Fax can be used.

Stop the USBI/O

SCB (System control board)USB section

E85-11 Network protocol stack initializa-tion abnormalityThe resetting of the Network pro-tocol stack has been failed.

Stop the Net-work function





4-56


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

Net

wor

k Network abnormalities

E85-12 Network reset abnormalityThe resetting of the Network pro-tocol stack has been failed.

Stop the Net-work function


E85-13 Network print operation abnor-malitySoftware abnormality in the Net-work print JOB sequence.

Stop the Net-work print function

SCB (System control board)JOB, NetWork section

E85-14 Network print operation abnor-malitySoftware abnormality when receiving a Network print signal.

E85-15 Network print operation abnor-malitySoftware abnormality when receiving a Network print (Apple-Talk) signal.

E85-17 Network scan operation abnor-malitySoftware abnormality in the Net-work scan JOB sequence.

Stop the Net-work scan function

E85-18 Network scan operation abnor-malitySoftware abnormality when send-ing a Network scan signal.


E85-20 MIB module abnormalityMIB software abnormality

Stop the MIB function

E85-21 IPP module abnormalityIPP software abnormality

Stop the IPP function

E85-22 FTP server module abnormalityFTP server software abnormality

Stop the FTP server function

E85-23 WebTool module abnormalityWebTool software abnormality

Stop the WebTool func-tion

HD

D HDD abnor-mality

F86-6 FAX file initialization abnormality Stop the HDD function

HDD (Hard disk)Reformatting of the HDD

IP Printer board abnormalities

F87-1 Printer controller not identified.Printer controller did not respond.Copier/Fax can be used.

Printer cannot be used.

Printer controller

F87-2 Printer controller abnormalityError F87-1 occurred 3 times in succession.


F87-3 Printer controller HDD abnormalityHDD cannot be accessed.




4-57


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

Mai

n bo

dy System controlcommunication abnormalities

E88-1 Image abnormalityAbnormality detected in image processing at system control side.

If any copying operation is being made, stop the main body after completion of paper exit. Turn the RL1 (Main) off.


E89-1 Copy sequence abnormalityAbnormality in job object pointer. (Could not get page-control object for some reason.)


SCB (System control board)Engine section

E89-2 Copy sequence abnormalityAbnormality in memory copy sequence. (Cause unknown)

E89-3 Copy sequence abnormalityAbnormality in through copy sequence (FCOT). (Cause unknown)

E89-4 Copy sequence abnormalityMemory scanner did not com-plete stop. (Notification of stop completion not received from engine.)

E89-5 Copy sequence abnormalityMemory printer did not complete stop. (Notification of stop comple-tion not received from engine.)

E89-6 SW2 (Sub power switch) OFF processing wait timeout

Engine power supply OFFAll indicators on the opera-tion panel light.


E89-11 Carriage return not possible errorAbnormality when setting a timer(Count is made at E89-6.)


E89-12 Carriage return not possible errorAbnormality when canceling a timer(Count is made at E89-6.)




4-58


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

Mai

n bo


E89-21 Carriage return not possible errorOperation abnormality when copying interrupt.(Printer user job)(Count is made at E89-6.)



E89-22 Carriage return not possible errorOperation abnormality when copying interrupt.(Printer job 0)(Count is made at E89-6.)

E89-23 Carriage return not possible errorOperation abnormality when copying interrupt.(Printer job 1)(Count is made at E89-6.)

E89-24 Carriage return not possible errorOperation abnormality when copying interrupt.(FCOT printer user job)(Count is made at E89-6.)

E89-25 Carriage return not possible errorOperation abnormality when copying interrupt.(FCOT user job)(Count is made at E89-6.)

E89-26 Carriage return not possible errorOperation abnormality when copying interrupt.(Copy print job)(Count is made at E89-6.)

E89-27 Carriage return not possible errorOperation abnormality when copying interrupt.(Copy print job 0)(Count is made at E89-6.)

E89-28 Carriage return not possible errorOperation abnormality when copying interrupt.(Copy print job 1)(Count is made at E89-6.)

E89-31 Abnormality when deleting task 0 due to the generation of queue 1 not possible.




4-59


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

Mai

n bo


E89-32 Abnormality when deleting queue 0 due to the generation of queue 1 not possible.



E89-33 Abnormality when deleting queue n due to the generation of task n not possible.

E89-34 Abnormality when deleting task 0 due to the generation of task 1 not possible.

E89-35 Abnormality when deleting queue 0 due to the generation of task 1 not possible.

E89-36 Abnormality when starting task nE89-37 Abnormality when deleting task nE89-38 Abnormality when deleting queue nE89-41 Scheduling abnormality (queue

operation abnormality) when FAX print cannot be started due to memory shortage.

E89-42 Scheduling abnormality (mes-sage transmission error) when FAX print cannot be started due to memory shortage.

E89-43 Printer scheduling abnormality (message transmission error) due to memory being full.

E89-51 Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (scanner scan user job)

E89-52 Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (scanner mixed scan job 0)

E89-53 Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (scanner Z-fold-ing scan job 0)

E89-54 Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (scanner normal scan job 0)

E89-55 Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (scanner scan job 1)

E89-56 Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (FAX scan user job)




4-60


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

*1 Parameter memory board abnormality display priority. For these error codes, the priority for display hasbeen specified. When two or more errors occur at the same time, they are displayed in the followingorder:

1.F80-42.F80-53.F80-34.F80-15.F80-2

Note:• For FAX related error codes, see “FK/FL Service Handbook”.

Mai

n bo


E89-57 Operation abnormality when copy-ing interrupt (FAX mixed scan job 0)



E89-58 Operation abnormality when copy-ing interrupt (FAX Z-folding scan job 0)

E89-59 Operation abnormality when copy-ing interrupt (FAX normal scan job 0)

E89-60 Operation abnormality when copy-ing interrupt (FAX scan job 1)

E89-61 Operation abnormality when copy-ing interrupt (FCOT scan user job)

E89-62 Operation abnormality when copy-ing interrupt (FCOT scan job)

E89-63 Operation abnormality when copy-ing interrupt (copy scan user job)

E89-64 Operation abnormality when copy-ing interrupt (copy mixed scan job 0)

E89-65 Operation abnormality when copy-ing interrupt (copy Z-folding scan job 0)

E89-66 Operation abnormality when copy-ing interrupt (copy normal scan job 0)

E89-67 Operation abnormality when copy-ing interrupt (copy scan job 1)

E89-80 Suspend occurenceCPU hang up due to software bug

E89-81 Exception occurenceCPU hang up due to software bug




4-61 1


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

4.2 About abnormal units isolation

As for the abnormalities listed below, the device can be used temporarily by separating the defective unit.Pressing the auto reset key while an error code appears and turning ON/OFF the SW2 (Sub power switch)allows you to detach the defective unit as a software and use other functions. However, when the SW2 isturned ON or OFF without removing the cause of trouble, the abnormality will be detected again with anerror code displayed. (Function effective for once only)

Error code Error Unit to be cut off Remarks18-1 Error in main body upper

tray upMain body upper tray Tray can not be selected.

18-2 Error in main body lower tray up

Main body lower tray Tray can not be selected.

18-3 Error in DB upper tray up DB upper tray Tray can not be selected.18-4 Error in DB lower tray/LCT

tray upDB lower tray/LCT tray Tray can not be selected.

18-5 Error in LT tray up LT tray Tray can not be selected.70-1, 70-9 FNS abnormality FNS FNS can not be used; FNS

must be removed.70-11 FNS abnormality FNS FNS can not be used; FNS

must be removed. (FS-112)77-2 Tray up/down drive abnor-

malityFNS FNS can not be used; FNS

must be removed. (FS-112)77-5 Pressure motor drive

abnormalityFNS FNS can not be used; FNS

must be removed. (FS-112)77-17 Fan motor drive abnormal-

ityFNS FNS can not be used; FNS

must be removed.77-3, 77-16 Error in FNS alignment

plateFNS stack section Only straight exit remains avail-

able. (FS-112)77-6, 77-11 FNS stapler error FNS stack section Only straight exit remains avail-

able. (FS-112)82-2 Document manager initial-

ization abnormalityHDD Copying, printing (except a per-

sonal letter) remain enabled.85-1 Network device abnormal-

ityNetwork Copying and faxing remain

enabled.85-2 IEEE1284 device abnor-

malityIEEE1284 Copying and faxing remain

enabled.85-3 USB device abnormality USB Copying and faxing remain

enabled.86-2, 86-3 FAX board error FAX Copying and printing remain

enabled.86-6 FAX file initialization

abnormalityHDD Copying, printing (except a per-

sonal letter) remain enabled.86-7, 86-8 FL-102 board error FL-102 Copy, FAX (1 line) and printer can be used.87-2, 87-3 Printer board abnormali-

tiesPrinter Copying and faxing remain

enabled.

4-62


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

4.3 L detection error code list

4.4 Network section status indication

For the SCB (System control board), there are two orange and green status indicator LED’s. The tablebelow shows the status indicated by these two LED’s.

Code Cause Clearance method Suspected defective part0003 The TDS (Toner density sensor) output

ripple at the end of L detection was 0.5V or less.

SW2 (Sub power switch)OFF/ON

• Developing unit con-nector

• TDS• CB (Main body con-

trol board)0004 The TDS output ripple while the devel-

oper is being agitated during L detection adjustment was 0.02V or less (there is almost no change in output).

SW2OFF/ON

• M1 (Main motor)• Developing agitator

screw• Developing unit con-

nector• TDS• CB

0005 TDS control voltage cannot be adjusted to within the range 5.76~7.46V.

SW2OFF/ON2

• Developer• TDS• CB

0006 TCSB (Toner control sensor board) out-put signal D/A conversion error

SW2OFF/ON

• CB• TSCB

ON/OFF of LED Status of network sectionGreen LED flashin Data being sent and receivedOrange LED on Network speed at 100 Mb/sOrange LED off Network speed at 10 Mb/s

4-63

TIMING CHART KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003

IV D

IAG

RA

MS

5. TIMING CHART

5.1 7145 timing chart

A. A4, life size, 2 copies, feed from tray 10

12

34

56

78

910

Item

Time (

sec)

SD1 (1

st pape

r feed

solenoid

/U)PS

1 (Re

gistra

tion se

nsor)

V-Va

lidPS

21 (T

iming

sens

or /U

)MC

1 (Re

gistra

tion c

lutch

)M

C2 (L

oop

clutc

h)PS

2 (Fix

ing ex

it sen

sor)

PS23

(IT ex

it sen

sor /U

)

M9 (P

aper

feed m

otor)

M11

(Fixi

ng m

otor

)M

1 (M

ain

mot

or)

M3 (D

evelo

ping m

otor)

SD7 (S

eparati

on claw

soleno

id)SD

4 (Cle

aning

web s

olenoi

d)HV

(Cha

rging

coro

na)

HV (D

evelo

ping b

ias)

HV (T

ransfe

r coron

a sect

ion)

HV (S

epara

tion c

orona

)PC

L (Pre-c

harging

exposu

re lam

p)TSL

(Trans

fer sync

hronizat

ion lam

p)HV

(Paper

entran

ce guide

plate)

STAR

T bu

tton

ON

: Doe

s no

t com

e O

N fo

r som

e co

py c

ount

s.

M3 (D

evelo

ping m

otor)

4-64

KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003 TIMING CHART

IV D

IAG

RA

MS

5.2 7145 ADU timing chart

A. A4, life size, 3 copies, feed from tray 1

R

600m

m/s

F

230m

m/s

230m

m/s

01

23

45

67

910

1112

1314

1516

8Ite

mTim

e (se

c)

SD1 (1

st pape

r feed

solenoid

/U)

PS1 (

Regis

tration

senso

r)

V-Va

lid

PS21

(Tim

ing se

nsor

/U)

MC1 (

Regis

tratio

n clut

ch)

MC2

(Loo

p clu

tch)

PS2 (

Fixing

exit s

enso

r)

SD5 (

ADU

gate

solen

oid)

PS4

(ADU

sen

sor)

PS24

(IT ex

it sen

sor /L

)

M1

(Mai

n m

otor

)

STAR

T bu

tton

ON

M6 (A

DU mo

tor)

600mm

/s

230mm

/s

230mm

/s

F R

4-65


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

5.3 DF-318 timing chart

A. A4, life size, single side original, 3 sheets0

12

34

56

Item

Time (

sec)

PS30

1 (No

origi

nal s

enso

r)

PS308

(Origi

nal re

gistra

tion se

nsor)

PS309

(Origi

nal co

nveyan

ce sen

sor)

Valid

(Sca

n)

M301

(O

rigina

l feed

moto

r)100

mm/s

250mm

/s

460mm

/s

F R

230mm

/s

M302

(Orig

inal c

on-

veya

nce m

otor)

460mm

/s

230mm

/s

F

M303

(Origin

al reve

rsal m

otor)

230mm

/s

460mm

/s

460mm

/s

F R

230mm

/s

SD30

2 (Ro

ller p

ressu

re so

lenoid

)

SD30

1 (Pa

per e

xit so

lenoid

)

PS30

2 (Or

igina

l exit

sens

or)

STAR

T bu

tton

ON

4-66


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

B. A4, life size, double side originals, 3 sheets

02

46

810

13

57

911

12Ite

mTim

e (se

c)

PS30

1 (No

origi

nal s

enso

r)

PS308

(Origi

nal re

gistra

tion se

nsor)

PS309

(Origi

nal co

nveyan

ce sen

sor)

Valid

(Sca

n)

M301

(O

rigina

l feed

moto

r)100

mm/s

250mm

/s

460mm

/s

F R230

mm/s

M302

(Orig

inal c

on-

veya

nce m

otor)

460mm

/s

230mm

/s

F

M303

(Origin

al reve

rsal m

otor)

230mm

/s

460mm

/s

460mm

/s

F R

230mm

/s

SD30

2 (Ro

ller p

ressu

re so

lenoid

)

SD30

1 (Pa

per e

xit so

lenoid

)

PS30

2 (Or

igina

l exit

sens

or)

STAR

T bu

tton

ON

4-67


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

5.4 DB-211/DB-411 timing chart

A. A4, single side, 3 copies, feed from tray 3

01

23

56

74

Item

Time (

sec)

M9 (P

aper

feed m

otor)

M100

(DB Pa

per fee

d moto

r)

SD101

(Paper

feed so

lenoid/U

)

PS1 (

Regis

tration

senso

r)

V-Va

lid

MC1 (

Regis

tration

clutch

)

MC2

(Loo

p clu

tch)

PS104

(Paper

feed se

nsor /U

)

PS2 (

Fixing

exit s

enso

r)

STAR

T bu

tton

ON

4-68


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

5.5 LT-203 timing chart

A. A4, single side, 3 copies

01

23

56

87

4Ite

mTim

e (se

c)

M9 (P

aper

feed m

otor)

M100

(DB Pa

per fee

d moto

r)

M150

(LT pa

per fee

d moto

r)

SD151

(LT pa

per fee

d soleno

id)

PS1 (

Regis

tration

senso

r)

V-Va

lid

MC1 (

Regis

tration

clutch

)

MC2

(Loo

p clu

tch)

PS155

(Pape

r feed

sensor

)

PS104

(Paper

feed se

nsor /U

)

PS2 (

Fixing

exit s

enso

r)

STAR

T bu

tton

ON

4-69


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

5.6 FS-112 timing chart

A. A4, sort mode, 2 originals, 2 sets setting

02

46

81

35

7Tim

e (se

c)

PS2(M

ain bo

dy fix

ing ex

it sen

sor)

PS70

2 (FN

S entr

ance

sens

or)

PS70

3 (P

aper

exit

sens

or)

M702

(P

aper

exit m

otor)

600mm

/s

230mm

/s

F R

SD70

1 (Ro

ller re

lease

solen

oid)

M701

(FNS c

onveya

nce mo

tor)60

0mm/

s

230m

m/s

M703

(A

lignm

ent m

otor /R

)Alig

nment

/Shift

Ope

n

M704

(A

lignm

ent m

otor /F

)Ali

gnme

nt

Shift/

Open

M705

(Stapler

movem

ent mo

tor)F R

M708

(Stap

ler m

otor)

M707

(Paper

press

ure mo

tor)

Pres

sure

Rele

ase

M706

(Tray

up/dow

n moto

r)R

aise

Low

er

Item

4-70


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

B. A4, staple mode, 2 originals, 1 position, 2 sets setting0

24

68

13

57

Item

Time (

sec)

PS2(M

ain bo

dy fix

ing ex

it sen

sor)

PS70

2 (FN

S entr

ance

sens

or)

PS70

3 (P

aper

exit

sen

sor)

M702

(P

aper

exit m

otor)

600mm

/s

230mm

/s

F R

SD70

1 (Ro

ller re

lease

solen

oid)

M701

(FNS c

onveya

nce mo

tor)60

0mm/

s

230m

m/s

M703

(A

lignm

ent m

otor /R

)Alig

nment

/Shift

Ope

n

M704

(A

lignm

ent m

otor /F

)Ali

gnme

nt

Shift/

Open

M705

(Stapler

movem

ent mo

tor)F R

M708

(Stap

ler m

otor)

M707

(Paper

press

ure mo

tor)

Pres

sure

Rele

ase

M706

(Tray

up/dow

n moto

r)R

aise

Low

er

4-71


IV D

IAG

RA

MS


A. Non-sort, 1 original, 1 copy setting

L H

ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF L H

PS2 (

Fixing

exit s

enso

r)

M1 (E

ntran

ce m

otor)

M4 (U

pper e

ntranc

e moto

r)

SL1 (

Uppe

r/lowe

r entr

ance

sw

itchin

g sole

noid)

SL2

(1st

tray

ent

ranc

e se

lect

ing

sole

noid

)

PC1 (

1st tra

y exit

sensor

)

Item

FNS

mov

emen

t sta

rting

sig

nal O

N

4-72


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

B. Sort, 2 originals, 2 sets setting

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

L H

ON

OFF L H

ON

OFF H L

PS2 (

Fixing

exit s

enso

r)

M1 (E

ntran

ce m

otor)

PC3 (

Stor

age s

enso

r)

M8

(Shi

ft m

otor

)

PC10

(Shift h

ome p

osition

sensor

)

M3

(Exi

t mot

or)

Item

FNS

mov

emen

t sta

rting

sig

nal O

N

Shift

pos

ition

Forw

ard

rota

tion

Stop

Back

war

d ro

tatio

n

4-73


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

C. Rear corner stapling, A4R, 2 originals, 2 sets setting

11

1

11

11

22

2

2

2

2

L H L H L H

ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFFH L

PS2 (

Fixing

exit s

enso

r)

M1 (E

ntran

ce m

otor)

M4 (U

pper e

ntranc

e moto

r)

M2 (L

ower

entran

ce mo

tor)

PC4 (

Upper

entra

nce se

nsor)

PC2 (

Lower

entran

ce sen

sor)

FNS

mov

emen

t sta

rting

sig

nal O

N

PC3 (

Stor

age s

enso

r)

M5 (C

D ali

gning

moto

r)

M15 (

Upper

paddl

e moto

r)

SL3 (

Upper

paddl

e sole

noid)

M9 (L

ower

padd

le mo

tor)

M3

(Exi

t mot

or)

M6 (St

apling

unit mo

ving mo

tor)

Stap

ling

mot

or1

M13 (E

xit rolle

r/rolls s

pacing

motor)

M12

(Sto

rage

rolle

r/ro

lls s

paci

ng m

otor

)

M8

(Shi

ft m

otor

)

Item

Spac

ing

Forw

ard

rota

tion

Stop

Back

war

d ro

tatio

n

Forw

ard

rota

tion

Stop

Back

war

d ro

tatio

n

Forw

ard

rota

tion

Stop

Back

war

d ro

tatio

n

Switc

hbac

k

Alig

ning

Alig

ning

Tran

spor

t to fin

isher

tray

Tran

spor

t to fin

isher

tray

Stap

ling

Stap

ling

Pres

sure

Spac

ing

Pres

sure Sh

iftSh

ift

Spac

ing

4-74


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

D. Non-sort, hole punch, 1 original, 1 copy setting

L H L H

ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF

PS2 (

Fixing

exit s

enso

r)

M1 (E

ntran

ce m

otor)

M4 (U

pper e

ntranc

e moto

r)SL

1 (Up

per/lo

wer e

ntran

ce

switc

hing s

oleno

id)SL

2 (1

st tr

ay e

ntra

nce

sele

ctin

g so

leno

id)

M11

(Pun

ch m

otor

)

Item

FNS

mov

emen

t sta

rting

sig

nal O

N

Punc

h cl

utch

PC1 (

1st tra

y exit

sensor

)

Punc

hing

mov

emen

t

4-75


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

1


A. Non-sort, A4, 1 copy setting

4349T506BA

ON

OFF

Tran

spor

t sen

sor

(PC

5-FN

)

Forw

ard

Stop

Entra

nce

mot

or(M

3-FN

)H

igh

Low

Stop

Tran

spor

t mot

or(M

2-FN

)

Forw

ard

Stop

Exit

mot

or(M

1-FN

)

4-76


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

B. 1 staple, 2 holes, A4, 2 originals, 2 sets setting

4349T505BA

Punc

h se

nsor

ON

OFF

Stor

age

tray

dete

ctin

g se

nsor

(PC

8-FN

)O

NO

FF

Entra

nce

mot

or(M

3-FN

)Fo

rwar

dSt

op

Tran

spor

t mot

or(M

2-FN

)

Hig

hLo

wSt

op

Exit

mot

or(M

1-FN

)

Forw

ard

Stop

Back

war

d

Reg

istra

tion

clut

ch(C

L1-F

N)

ON

OFF

Punc

h dr

ive

mot

orFo

rwar

dSt

op

Exit

open

/clo

se m

otor

(M6-

FN)

Forw

ard (R

etrac

tion)

Stop

Back

ward

(Pres

sure)

Stor

age

padd

le s

olen

oid

(SL1

-FN

)O

NO

FF

Alig

nmen

t mot

or 1

(M4-

FN)

Forw

ard

Stop

Back

war

d

Alig

nmen

t mot

or 2

(M5-

FN)

Forw

ard

Stop

Back

war

d

Staplin

g unit

movin

g moto

r(M

7-FN

)Fo

rwar

dSt

op

Stap

ler m

otor

Fo

rwar

dSt

op

4-77 1


IV D

IAG

RA

MS

1

5.9 SK-114 timing chart

A. Booklet-binding, 2-point stapling, A4R, 2 originals, 1 set setting

4511T504BA

Punc

h se

nsor

ON

OFF

Storag

e tray

detec

ting s

enso

r(P

C8-

FN)

ON

OFF

Tran

spor

t mot

or(M

2-FN

)H

igh

Low

Stop

Exit

mot

or(M

1-FN

)Fo

rwar

dSt

opBa

ckwa

rdR

egis

tratio

n cl

utch

(CL1

-FN

)O

NO

FFC

reas

e m

otor

(M10

-SK)

Forw

ard

Stop

Exit

open

/clo

se m

otor

(M6-

FN)

Forw

ard

Stop

Back

ward

Entra

nce

mot

or(M

3-FN

)H

igh

Low

Stop

Stor

age p

addle

solen

oid(S

L1-F

N)

ON

OFF

Alig

nmen

t mot

or 1

(M4-

FN)

Forw

ard

Stop

Back

ward

Alig

nmen

t mot

or 2

(M4-

FN)

Forw

ard

Stop

Back

ward

Sadd

le ex

it ope

n/clos

e moto

r(M

9-SK

)Fo

rwar

dSt

opBa

ckwa

rd

Stap

ler m

otor

1Fo

rwar

dSt

op

Stap

ler m

otor

2Fo

rwar

dSt

opSa

ddle

exi

t mot

or(M

8-SK

)Fo

rwar

dSt

op

1st D

ocum

ent

2nd

Doc

umen

t

4-78

K OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM

4-79C

N25

3-3

CN

253-

2C

N25

3-1

VR30

1O

rigin

al s

ize

VRC

N21

3- 1

5V

CN

213-

2 V

RC

N21

3- 3

SG

ND

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

7 8 9

7 8 9

Symbol

CrimpConnector Faston

Relay connector

Symbol Part name LocationDFDB DF drive board 1-DM301 Original feed motor 2-BM302 Original conveyance motor 3-BM303 Original reverse motor 3-BFM301 Cooling fan 4-BSD301 Exit solenoid 1-ASD302 Roller pressure solenoid 1-ASD303 Stamp solenoid 2-APS301 No original sensor 4-BPS302 Original exit sensor 5-BPS303 DF open/close sensor 5-BPS304 Cover open/close sensor 5-BPS305 Original size sensor/1 6-BPS306 Original size sensor/2 6-BPS308 Original registration sensor 5-BPS309 Original conveyance sensor 6-BVR301 Original size VR 7-B

ONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003

6. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM

6.1 DF-318 Overall Wiring Diagram

CN

245-

3C

N24

5-2

CN

245-

1

CN

232-

1C

N23

2-2

CN

231-

1C

N23

1-2

CN

246-

3C

N24

6-2

CN

246-

1

CN

201-

A14

CN

201-

B 6

CN

201-

B 7

CN

201-

B 8

CN

201-

B15

CN

201-

B16

CN

201-

B17

CN

201-

B18

CN

201-

A 1

CN

201-

A 2

CN

201-

A 3

CN

201-

A 4

CN

201-

A 5

CN

201-

A 6

CN

201-

A 7

CN

201-

A 8

CN

201-

A 9

CN

201-

A10

CN

201-

A11

CN

201-

A12

CN

201-

A13

PS30

6

PS30

5

CN

243-

3C

N24

3-2

CN

243-

1

CN

242-

3C

N24

2-2

CN

242-

1

PS30

1

PS30

2

PS30

3

CN

241-

3C

N24

1-2

CN

241-

1

CN

249-

1C

N24

9-2

CN

249-

3

CN

202-

3C

N20

2-2

CN

202-

1

CN

248-

3C

N24

8-2

CN

248-

1

PS30

4

PS30

8

PS30

9

CN

244-

3C

N24

4-2

CN

244-

1

CN

202-

1

CN

202-

3C

N20

2-2

SD30

2

SD30

1

CN

233-

1SD

303

CN

233-

2

CN

201-

B11

CN

201-

B12

CN

201-

B13

CN

201-

B14

CN

201-

B10

CN

201-

B 9

CN

200-

6

CN

200-

2

CN

200-

4C

N20

0- 5

CN

201-

A15

CN

201-

B 3

CN

201-

B 4

CN

201-

A17

CN

201-

A16

CN

201-

B 2

CN

201-

B 1

CN

65-

6 24

VC

N65

- 5

24V

CN

17-B

11 M

303

CLO

CK

CN

17-B

13 M

303

F/R

CN

17-A

5 M

301

RST

CN

17-A

3 M

301

F/R

CN

17-B

17 M

302

CLO

CK

CN

17-A

1 M

301

CLO

CK

CN

17-A

14 V

R30

1C

N17

-A13

PS3

05C

N17

-A12

PS3

04C

N17

-A11

PS3

03C

N17

-A10

PS3

02C

N17

-A 9

PS3

01C

N17

-A 8

SD

301

CO

NT

CN

17-A

7 S

GN

D

CN

17-A

4 M

301

LOC

K

CN

17-A

2 S

GN

D

CN

17-B

16 S

GN

DC

N17

-B15

M30

2 LO

CK

CN

17-B

6 P

S306

CN

17-B

14 M

303

LOC

K

CN

17-B

12 S

GN

D

CN

17-B

10 S

GN

DC

N17

-B 9

SD

302

DR

IVE

CN

17-B

8 P

S309

CN

17-B

7 P

S308

CN

201-

B 8

CN

201-

B 7

CN

201-

B 6

CN

201-

B 5

CN

201-

B 9

CN

201-

B10

CN

201-

B11

CN

201-

B 4

CN

201-

A 4

CN

201-

B 3

CN

201-

B 2

CN

201-

B 1

CN

201-

A17

CN

201-

A16

CN

201-

A15

CN

201-

A14

CN

201-

A13

CN

201-

A12

CN

201-

A11

CN

201-

A10

CN

201-

A 9

CN

201-

A 8

CN

201-

A 7

CN

201-

A 6

CN

201-

A 5

CN

201-

B12

CN

201-

B13

CN

201-

B15

CN

201-

A 1

CN

201-

A 2

CN

201-

A 3

CN

201-

B16

CN

201-

B17

CN

17-B

4 M

303

V0C

N17

-B 3

M30

2 V1

CN

17-B

2 M

302

V0C

N17

-B 1

M30

1 V0

CN

65-

1 SG

ND

CN

65-

2 5V

CN

65-

4 PG

ND

CN

65-

3 PG

ND

Orig

inal

con

veya

nce

sens

or

Orig

inal

siz

ese

nsor

/1

Orig

inal

siz

ese

nsor

/2

No

orig

inal

sen

sor

Orig

inal

exi

t sen

sor

DF

open

/clo

sese

nsor

Cov

er o

pen/

clos

ese

nsor

Orig

inal

regi

stra

tion

sens

orRol

ler p

ress

ure

sole

noid

Exit

sole

noid

CN

214-

A 2

24V

CN

214-

A 5

DR

IVE

CN

214-

A 3

24V

CN

214-

A 6

DR

IVE

CN

214-

A 1

24V

CN

214-

A 4

DR

IVE

CN

215-

3 5

VC

N21

5- 2

PS

CN

215-

1 S

GN

D

CN

215-

6 5

VC

N21

5- 5

PS

CN

215-

4 S

GN

D

CN

215-

9 5

VC

N21

5- 8

PS

CN

215-

7 S

GN

D

CN

215-

12

5VC

N21

5- 1

1 PS

CN

215-

10

SGN

D

CN

215-

15

5VC

N21

5- 1

4 PS

CN

215-

13

SGN

D

CN

215-

16

5VC

N21

5- 1

7 PS

CN

215-

18

SGN

D

CN

216-

6 5

VC

N21

6- 5

PS

CN

216-

4 S

GN

D

CN

216-

3 5

VC

N21

6- 2

PS

CN

216-

1 S

GN

D

CN

212-

1 2

4VC

N21

2- 2

24V

CN

212-

3 P

GN

DC

N21

2- 4

PG

ND

CN

200-

3C

N21

2- 5

5V

CN

200-

1C

N21

2- 6

SG

ND

CN

212-

7 F

G N

D

CN

211-

A 5

VR30

1C

N21

1-A

6 PS

305

CN

211-

A 7

PS30

4C

N21

1-A

8 PS

303

CN

211-

A 9

PS30

2C

N21

1-A1

0 PS

301

CN

211-

A11

SD30

1 C

ON

TC

N21

1-A1

2 SG

ND

CN

211-

A18

M30

1 C

LOC

K

CN

211-

A16

M30

1 F/

RC

N21

1-A1

7 SG

ND

CN

211-

A15

M30

1 LO

CK

CN

211-

A14

M30

1 R

ST

CN

211-

B 4

M30

2 LO

CK

CN

211-

B11

PS30

9C

N21

1-B1

2 PS

308

CN

211-

A 4

SD30

3

CN

211-

A 2

FM30

1 LO

CK

CN

211-

B10

SD30

2 D

RIV

E

CN

17-A

17 F

M30

1C

N17

-A16

FM

301

CN

17-A

15 S

D30

3

CN

201-

B18

CN

201-

A18

CN

17-A

18 5

V

CN

201-

A18

CN

17-B

5 M

303

V1C

N20

1-B1

4C

N20

1-B

5

CN

17-B

18 S

GN

D

CN

211-

B18

M30

1 V0

CN

211-

B17

M30

2 V0

CN

211-

B16

M30

2 V1

CN

211-

B15

M30

3 V0

CN

211-

B14

M30

3 V1

CN

211-

B13

PS30

6

CN

211-

B 9

SGN

DC

N21

1-B

8 M

303

CLO

CK

CN

211-

B 7

SGN

DC

N21

1-B

6 M

303

F/R

CN

211-

B 5

M30

3 LO

CK

CN

211-

B 3

SGN

DC

N21

1-B

2 M

302

CLO

CK

CN

211-

B 1

SGN

D

CN

211-

A 1

5V

Stam

p so

leno

idC

N17

-A 6

M30

1 R

TNC

N21

1-A1

3 M

301

RTN

CN

211-

A 3

FM30

1 O

N

M30

1

CN

221-

2C

N22

1-5

CN

221-

1C

N22

1-3

CN

221-

6C

N22

1-4

M30

2

CN

222-

2C

N22

2-5

CN

222-

1C

N22

2-3

CN

222-

6C

N22

2-4

M30

3

CN

223-

2C

N22

3-5

CN

223-

1C

N22

3-3

CN

223-

6C

N22

3-4

Orig

inal

feed

mot

or

Orig

inal

con

veya

nce

mot

or

Orig

inal

reve

rse

mot

or

CN

214-

B 5

24V

CN

214-

B 6

24V

CN

214-

B 1

BC

N21

4-B

2 B

CN

214-

B 3

AC

N21

4-B

4 A

CN

214-

B 7

24V

CN

214-

B 8

24V

CN

214-

A11

BC

N21

4-A1

2 B

CN

214-

A13

AC

N21

4-A1

4 A

CN

214-

B 9

24V

CN

214-

B10

24V

CN

214-

A 7

BC

N21

4-A

8 B

CN

214-

A 9

AC

N21

4-A1

0 A

FM30

1C

N22

4-3

CN

224-

2C

N22

4-1

Coo

ling

fan

CN

214-

B12

DR

IVE

CN

214-

B13

LOC

KC

N21

4-B1

4 PG

ND

N.C

CB(MAIN BODY)

DFDB

1

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

OVER KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003

4-80

6.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

C

D

G

H

7 8 9

7 8 9

Symbol


Relay connector

Symbol Part name LocationLT-203 LT-203 1-BPSDTB/3 Paper size detection

board /35-C

PSDTB/4 Paper size detection board /4

5-F

M100 DB paper feed motor 5-AM101 Tray up drive motor /3 5-BM102 Tray up drive motor /4 5-ESD101 Paper feed solenoid /U 5-BSD102 Paper feed solenoid /L 5-EPS101 Tray sensor /3 5-EPS102 Tray upper limit sensor /3 5-DPS103 No paper sensor /3 5-DPS104 Paper feed sensor /U 5-DPS105 Paper feed sensor /L 5-CPS106 Tray sensor /4 5-GPS107 Tray upper limit sensor /4 5-FPS108 No paper sensor /4 5-GPS109 Remaining paper sensor 3-HHTR100 Internal heater 3-I

ALL WIRING DIAGRAM

2 DB-211/411 Overall Wiring Diagram

PTC

HTR 100

Internal heater

24V2 7-5 100-1 24V2100-2 24V2

100-5 5V

100-3 PGND100-4 PGND

100-6 SGND J60:5 - J60:6 -

J60:3 - J60:4 - J60:7 - J60:8 - J60:9 - J60:10-

3 4 7 8 9 10

6 5

24V2 7-6 PGND 7-7 PGND 7-8

RL PW 7-25 RL PG 7-26

5V2 7-10 SGND 7-14

19- 9 19- 8 19- 7 19- 6 19- 5 19- 4 19- 3 19- 2 19- 1 J61: 9 -

J61: 8 -J61: 7 -J61: 6 -J61: 5 -

1 2 3 4 5

J61: 4 -J61: 3 -J61: 2 -J61: 1 -

6 7 8 9 101- 2 LCT.EXIT

101- 3 DB.EXIT

101- 1 DB.RST

101- 4 DB.TXD101- 5 GND101- 6 DB.CTS101- 7 DB.RXD101- 8 GND101- 9 DB.RTS

J80:1-

J80:2-

1

2 J120-2J120-1

J60:1 -

J60:2 -

1

2

24V1 7-1

PGND 7-3

DB-411Only

MAIN BODY

Remaining paper sensor

PS109

119-3

-1 -2

105-1 SGN

D

105-3 5V105-2 SET

102-6 NC

102-11 5V

102-3 PGND102-4 PGND

102-10 SGND

110-11 -10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1

102-5 NC

102-9 ON2102-8 CLOCK

102-7 F/RDB paper feed motor

102-1 24V2102-2 24V2

SD 101103-A1 24V2 113: 1 - 2

1113: 2 -103-A2 DRIVE Paper feed solenoid/U

111- 2111- 1

M10

1

M10

0

PSDTB/3

PSDTB/4

103-A4 24V2 Tray up drive motor/3103-A3 DRIVE

PS 105J64: 2- 7

6J64: 3-

J64: 1- 8

117- 3 - 2 - 1

103-A10 SGND

103-A12 5V103-A11 PS Paper feed sensor/L

PS 102J63: 5- 2

1J63: 6-

J63: 4- 3

114- 3 - 2 - 1

J69: 6-J69: 5- 2

1

J69: 4- 3 Tray upper limit sensor/3103-B1 SGND

103-B3 5V103-B2 PS

PS 103J63: 2-

4J63: 3-

J63: 1- 6

115- 3 - 2 - 1

J69: 3-J69: 2- 5

4

J69: 1- 6 5 No paper sensor/3

103-B4 SGND

103-B6 5V103-B5 PS

PS 104J68: 2- 2

1J68: 3-

J68: 1- 3

116- 3 - 2 - 1 Paper feed sensor/U

103-B7 SGND

103-B9 5V103-B8 PS

PS 101J66: 2- 2

1J66: 3-

J66: 1- 3

112- 3 - 2 - 1 Tray sensor/3

103-B10 SGND

103-B12 5V103-B11 PS

SD 102104-1 24V2 123: 1 - 2

1123: 2 -104-2 DRIVE Paper feed solenoid/L

121- 2121- 1

M10

2

104-4 24V2 Tray up drive motor/4104-3 DRIVE

PS 107J65: 5- 7

6J65: 6-

J65: 4- 8

124- 3 - 2 - 1

J70: 6-J70: 5- 2

1

J70: 4- 3 Tray upper limit sensor/4104-10 SGND

104-12 5V104-11 PS

PS 108J65: 2-

J65: 3-

J65: 1-

125- 3 - 2 - 1

J70: 3-J70: 2- 5

4

J70: 1- 6 10 No paper sensor/4 9

11103-13 SGND

104-15 5V104-14 PS

PS 106J67: 2- 2

1J67: 3-

J67: 1- 3

122- 3 - 2 - 1 Tray sensor/4

104-16 SGND

104-18 5V104-17 PS

118- 5 - 4 - 3 - 2 - 1

103-A5 SIZE.D

103-A7 SIZE.B103-A6 SIZE.C

103-A8 SIZE.A103-A9 SELECT

J64: 8- 1 2J64: 7-

J64: 6-J64: 5-J64: 4- 5

4 3 Paper size detection board

126- 5 - 4 - 3 - 2 - 1

104-5 SIZE.D

104-7 SIZE.B104-6 SIZE.C

104-8 SIZE.A104-9 SELECT

J65:11- 1 2J65:10-

J65: 9-J65: 8-J65: 7- 5

4 3 Paper size detection board

TRAY

4

DB-211only

TRAY

3PS152 110- 7PS153 110- 6PS154 110- 5PS151 110- 4

LCT_TYPE 110- 3106-18 5V 110- 2

PS155 110- 8SD151 DRIVE 110- 9

M150 CONT 110-10M150 CLOCK 110-11

M150 F/R 110-12LT CLOSE 110-13

M151 DRIVE 110-14PGND 110-15PGND 110-1624V2 110-1724V2 110-1824V2 110-19

LT-203106- 1 24V2106- 2 24V2106- 3 24V2106- 4 PGND

106- 7 LT CLOSE

106-10 M150 CONT106-11 SD151 DRIVE106-12 PS155106-13 PS152106-14 PS153106-15 PS154

106-19 SGNDSGND 110- 1106-18 5V106-17 LCT_TYPE106-16 PS151

106- 9 M150 CLOCK106- 8 M150 F/R

106- 6 M151 DRIVE106- 5 PGND

DBDB

1

A

B

E

F

I

2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6


4-81

motor

p drive motor

per feed solenoid

ining paper sensor/1

ining paper sensor/2

feed sensor

per sensor

pper limit sensor

ck switch

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

7 8 9

7 8 9

Symbol


Relay connector

Symbol Part name LocationDB-211 DB-211 1-BDB-411 DB-411 1-BM150 LT paper feed motor 6-CM151 Tray up drive motor 6-BSD151 LT paper feed sole-

noid6-D

PS151 Remaining paper sensor /2

6-F

PS152 Tray upper limit sensor

6-E

PS153 No paper sensor 6-EPS154 Remaining paper

sensor /16-F

PS155 Paper feed sensor 6-DMS151 Interlock switch 6-AHTR150 Internal heater 4-G


6.3 LT-203 Overall Wiring Diagram

PTC

Internal heater

HTR 150

(LD)

112-12 5V

112-6 PGND

112-8 F/R

112-11 SGND

120-11 -10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1

112-9 CLOCK112-10 CONT

(H/L)

112-4 24V2112-5 24V2

112-7 PGND

M15

0

LT paper feed

(CN113:miniCT)

121- 1121- 2

M15

1112-1 24V112-2 DRIVE112-3 PGND

Tray u

1

2J121-2J121-1

1

2

DB-211DB-411

DBDB

LTDB

J80 :1 -

J80 :2 -

J120 :2 -MAIN BODYDCPS

DBPTC HEATER

J120 :1 -

SD 151 2

1113- 2 DRIVE J84: 1 -

J84: 2 - 2 1J82: 5-

J82: 4- LT pa113- 1 24V2

106-10 M150 CONT106-11 SD151 DRIVE

106-12 PS155106-13 PS152

106-16 PS151106-15 PS154106-14 PS153

106- 4 PGND

106- 2 24V2106- 1 24V2

106- 9 M150 CLOCK

106- 5 PGND

106-19 SGND106-18 5V

106-17 SGND

106- 8 M150 F/R106- 7 LT CLOSE

106- 6 M151 DRIVE

106- 3 24V2

110- 7 PS152

110- 4 PS151

110- 6 PS153

110-16 PGND

110-18 24V2110-19 24V2

110- 5 PS154

110-10 M150 CONT110-11 M150 CLOCK

110-15 PGND

110- 1 SGND110- 2 5V

110- 8 PS155110- 9 SD151 DRIVE

110-12 M150 F/R110-13 LT CLOSE110-14 M151 DRIVE

110-17 24V2

110- 3 SGND

PS 154

126- 3 - 2 - 1 Rema113-13 PS

113-12 SGND

113-14 5V

PS 151

122- 3 - 2 - 1 Rema113-16 PS

113-17 5V

113-15 SGND

113- 4 PS113- 3 SGND

113- 5 5V

J82: 3-J82: 2-J82: 1- PS 15

5

127- 3 - 2 - 1 Paper

3 4 5

No pa 5 4

6 PS 153

124- 3 - 2 - 1113-10 PS J83: 1-

J83: 2-J83: 3-113- 9 SGND

113-11 5V

PS 152

125- 3 - 2 - 1

1 2 3 Tray u

J83: 6-J83: 5-J83: 4-113- 7 PS

113- 6 SGND

113- 8 5V

MS15

1

Interlo114-1 24V

114-2 PGND114-3 24V2 FT102(4pin)

FT101(1pin)

NC (2pin)

1

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6


4-82

ALL WIRING DIAGRAM

Blank page


4-83PS

714

Stap

ler r

eady

sen

sor

SGN

D5V PS

CN

751-

2C

N75

1-1

2 12

165

166

164

1231

CN

753-

2C

N75

3-1

CN

752-

3C

N75

2-2

CN

752-

1

CN

754-

1C

N75

4-2

2 1

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

7 8 9

7 8 9

Symbol


Relay connector


6.4 FS-112 Overall Wiring Diagram

MS7

02Sh

utte

r sw

itch

CN

701-

1 24

VC

N70

1-2

24V

CN

701-

3 24

V

CN

701-

4 5V

CN

701-

5 5V

CN

701-

6 SG

ND

CN

701-

7 SG

ND

CN

701-

8 PG

ND

CN

701-

9 PG

ND

CN

701-

10 P

GN

D

CN

702-

11 S

GN

DC

N70

2-10

SG

ND

CN

702-

9 M

ACK/

FSC

TSC

N70

2-8

SGN

DC

N70

2-7

SREQ

/NC

CN

702-

6 M

RXD

/FSS

INC

N70

2-5

SGN

DC

N70

2-4

SAC

K/FS

RTS

CN

702-

3 M

REQ

/NC

CN

702-

2 SG

ND

CN

702-

1 M

TXD

/FSO

UT

CN

300-

A10

24V

CN

300-

A9 2

4VC

N30

0-A8

24V

CN

300-

A11

NC

CN

300-

A4 5

VC

N30

0-A3

5V

CN

300-

A2 S

GN

DC

N30

0-A1

SG

ND

CN

300-

A7 P

GN

DC

N30

0-A6

PG

ND

CN

300-

A5 P

GN

D

CN

300-

B1 S

GN

DC

N30

0-B2

SG

ND

CN

300-

B3 M

ACK/

FSC

TSC

N30

0-B4

SG

ND

CN

300-

B5 S

REQ

/NC

CN

300-

B6 M

RXD

/FSS

INC

N30

0-B7

SG

ND

CN

300-

B8 S

ACK/

FSR

TSC

N30

0-B9

MR

EQ/N

CC

N30

0-B1

0 SG

ND

CN

300-

B11

MTX

D/F

SOU

T

CN

703-

8 B

CN

703-

6 A

CN

703-

5 A

CN

703-

7 B

CN

703-

1 2

4V3

CN

703-

2 2

4V3

CN

723-

6C

N72

3-2

CN

723-

3C

N72

3-5

CN

723-

1

CN

723-

4

CN

703-

11 B

CN

703-

12 B

CN

703-

9 A

CN

703-

10 A

CN

703-

3 2

4V4

CN

703-

4 2

4V4

CN

724-

1C

N72

4-5

CN

724-

3C

N72

4-2

CN

724-

6C

N72

4-4

CN

705-

6 B

CN

705-

2 2

4V4

CN

705-

3 A

CN

705-

4 A

CN

705-

1 2

4V4

CN

705-

5 B

CN

725-

4C

N72

5-6

CN

725-

2C

N72

5-3

CN

725-

5C

N72

5-1

CN

704-

7 B

CN

704-

5 A

CN

704-

6 A

CN

704-

8 B

CN

704-

1 2

4V1

CN

704-

2 2

4V1

M70

1FN

S co

nvey

ance

m

otor

CN

704-

9 A

CN

704-

11 B

CN

704-

12 B

CN

704-

10 A

CN

704-

3 2

4V2

CN

704-

4 2

4V2

CN

746-

2C

N74

6-3

CN

746-

1

CN

713-

1 L

OC

K

CN

713-

3 P

GN

DC

N71

3-2

24V

Pape

r exi

t m

otor

M70

2

CN

721-

9C

N72

1-7

CN

721-

5C

N72

1-3

CN

721-

1

CN

721-

11

CN

722-

5C

N72

2-3

CN

722-

1

CN

722-

11C

N72

2-9

CN

722-

7

FM70

1C

oolin

g m

otor

CN

710-

2 D

RIV

E2C

N71

0-1

DR

IVE1

1 2M

706

Tray

up/

dow

n m

otor

Pres

sure

mot

orM

707

CN

730-

1C

N73

0-2

Alig

nmen

t m

otor

/RM7

03

Alig

nmen

t m

otor

/FM7

04

Stap

ler

mov

emen

t m

otor

M705

CN

734-

1C

N73

4-2

CN

734-

3

Tray

upp

er li

mit

sens

orPS

711

Pape

r exi

t sen

sor

PS70

3

Pape

r exi

t ful

l sen

sor

PS70

4

Tray

cou

nt s

enso

rPS

716

Tray

low

er li

mit

sens

orPS

706

CN

716-

2 P

GN

DC

N71

6-1

DR

IVE

CN

762-

1C

N76

2-2

Rol

ler

rele

ase

sole

noid

SD70

1

CN

707-

A2 P

SC

N70

7-A1

SG

ND

CN

707-

A3 5

V

CN

707-

A4 S

GN

DC

N70

7-A5

PS

CN

707-

A6 5

V

CN

707-

A7 S

GN

DC

N70

7-A8

PS

CN

707-

A9 5

V

CN

707-

A10

SGN

DC

N70

7-A1

1 PS

CN

707-

A12

5V

CN

707-

A15

5VC

N70

7-A1

4 PS

CN

707-

A13

SGN

DC

N75

6-2

CN

756-

1

CN

756-

3

CN

756-

4

CN

756-

6C

N75

6-5

CN

756-

9C

N75

6-8

CN

756-

7

CN

756-

13C

N75

6-14

CN

756-

15

CN

756-

11C

N75

6-12

CN

756-

10

CN

733-

1C

N73

3-2

CN

733-

3

CN

732-

3C

N73

2-2

CN

732-

1

CN

734-

3C

N73

4-2

CN

734-

1PS

705

Shut

ter s

enso

r

PS70

1Pr

essu

re s

enso

r

FNS

entra

nce

sens

orPS

702

CN

706-

1 D

RIV

E1C

N70

6-2

DR

IVE2

CN

709-

1 N

CC

N70

9-2

PSN

CC

N70

9-3

NC

CN

709-

4 SG

ND

CN

709-

5 PS

CN

709-

6 5V

CN

709-

12 5

VC

N70

9-11

PS

CN

709-

10 S

GN

D

CN

709-

9 5V

CN

709-

8 PS

CN

709-

7 SG

ND

CN

726-

2C

N72

6-1

CN

737-

1C

N73

7-2

CN

737-

3

CN

744-

3C

N74

4-2

CN

744-

1

CN

735-

3C

N73

5-2

CN

735-

1

CN

736-

1C

N73

6-2

CN

736-

3

CN

707-

B15

NC

CN

707-

B14

NC

CN

707-

B13

NC

CN

707-

B12

5VC

N70

7-B1

1 PS

CN

707-

B10

SGN

D

CN

707-

B9 5

VC

N70

7-B8

PS

CN

707-

B7 S

GN

D

CN

707-

B6 5

VC

N70

7-B5

PS

CN

707-

B4 S

GN

D

CN

707-

B3 5

VC

N70

7-B2

PS

CN

707-

B1 S

GN

D

CN

741-

1C

N74

1-2

CN

741-

3

CN

740-

1C

N74

0-2

CN

740-

3

CN

738-

1C

N73

8-2

CN

738-

3

CN

739-

1C

N73

9-2

CN

739-

3

Alig

nmen

t HP

sens

or/F

PS71

0

Alig

nmen

t HP

sens

or/R

PS70

9

No

pape

r sen

sor

Stap

ler d

etec

tion

sens

or

Stap

ler H

P se

nsor

Stap

ler m

otor

PS70

7

Stap

ler u

nit H

P se

nsor

PS70

8

CN

708-

3 N

C

CN

708-

4 5V

CN70

8-5

PS71

2 PS

CN70

8-6

PS71

3 PS

CN70

8-7

PS71

4 PS

CN

708-

8 S

GN

D

PS71

3SG

ND5V PS

PS71

2SG

ND5V PS

CN

761-

2C

N76

1-3

CN

761-

4

CN

761-

1

CN

745-

5C

N74

5-4

CN

745-

2C

N74

5-3

CN

745-

1

CN

708-

1 D

RIV

E1

CN

708-

2 D

RIV

E2

M708

MTR

+M

TR+

MTR

-M

TR-

VCC

GN

DR

EAD

YLSH

D

CN

712-

1 24

V IN

CN

712-

2 24

V O

UT

CN

711-

2 24

V O

UT2

CN

711-

1 24

V IN

2

Fron

t doo

r sw

itch

MS7

01

FNSCB

MAIN BODY

1

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6


4-84

FMMMMMMMMFSMMPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP

ALL WIRING DIAGRAM

Symbol Part name LocationNSCB FNS control board 1-D701 FNS conveyance motor 1-H702 Paper exit motor 1-H703 Alignment motor /R 2-I704 Alignment motor /F 3-I705 Stapler movement motor 3-I706 Tray up/down motor 4-I707 Pressure motor 3-B708 Stapler motor 6-CM701 Cooling motor 2-ID701 Roller release solenoid 2-HS701 Front door switch 1-BS702 Shutter switch 1-BS701 Pressure sensor 2-BS702 FNS entrance sensor 2-BS703 Paper exit sensor 3-BS704 Paper exit full sensor 4-BS705 Shutter sensor 2-BS706 Tray lower limit sensor 4-BS707 No paper sensor 5-BS708 Stapler unit HP sensor 5-BS709 Alighnment HP sensor /R 5-BS710 Alighnment HP sensor /F 5-BS711 Tray upper limit sensor 3-BS712 Stapler HP sensor 6-BS713 Staple detection sensor 6-BS714 Stapler ready sensor 7-BS716 Tray count sensor 4-B


4-85

FS-113

C5V

S2 ON

ND

C24V

ND

ND

TXD

RXD

RTS

RTS

ND

C5V

S1 ON

ND

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

7 8 9

7 8 9

Symbol


Relay connector


6.5 RU-101 Overall Wiring Diagram

PS2

FUB

MAIN BODY

PS1

Passage sensor

Front door sensor

CN1-1

CN1-2

CN4-1

CN4-2

CN1-3

CN200A-7

CN200A-6

CN200A-5

CN200C-3

CN200C-2

CN200B-6

CN200B-7

CN200B-4

CN200B-2

CN200B-5

CN200B-3

CN3-2

CN3-1

CN3-4

CN3-3

CN3-6

CN3-5

CN300-A9

CN300-A10

CN300-A7

CN300-A8

CN300-A5

CN300-A6

DC24V

DC24V

GND

DC24V

GND

GND

CN300-B10

CN300-B11

CN300-B6

CN300-B8

CN300-B3

CN300-B4

CN200A-4

CN200A-3

CN200A-2

CN200C-1

D

P

G

D

G

G

M

M

M

M

G

D

P

G

CN2-1

CN2-2

CN2-3

1

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

Symbol Part name LocationFUB Fuse board 4-CPS1 Front door sensor 4-FPS2 Passage sensor 4-G


4-86

ALL WIRING DIAGRAM

Blank page


4-87

PS1

PS2

Exit Roll HomePosition Sensor

Passage Sensor (RU-101)

Front Door Sensor (RU-101)

PWB-C

Hole Punch Position Switch

Hole PunchSelector Motor

PWB-E_GL

Only for inchdestination A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

7 8 9

7 8 9

Symbol


Relay connector


6.6 FS-113 Overall Wiring Diagram

CN200C

CN201B

PWB-D

RU-101

WW

WW

BB

PWB-E_GL

PWD-F

PWD-F_GL

PW

D-F

PW

D-F

_GL

1

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6


4-88

RMMMMMMMMMMMMMMCSSSSSSSPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP

ALL WIRING DIAGRAM

Symbol Part name LocationU-101 RU-101 1-F1 Transport motor 3-B2 Lower entrance motor 3-A3 Exit motor 2-A4 Upper entrance motor 3-B5 CD aligning motor 5-B6 Stapling unit moving sensor 3-A7 Elevator motor 1-D8 Shift motor 1-C9 Lower paddle motor 5-A11 Punch motor 1-C12 Storage roller/rolls spacing motor 2-A13 Exit roller/rolls spacing motor 7-D14 Hole punch selector motor 7-A15 Upper paddle motor 7-DL Punch clutch 6-AL1 Upper/Lower entrance switching solenoid 7-EL2 1st entrance switching solenoid 7-EL3 Upper paddle solenoid 7-D1 Set switch 1-E2 Elevator tray upper limit switch 1-E3 Elevator tray lower limit switch 1-D4 Hole punch position switch 7-AC1 1st tray exit sensor 7-GC2 Lower entrance sensor 7-GC3 Storage sensor 5-HC4 Upper entrance sensor 5-HC5 Finisher tray paper detecting sensor 2-IC6 1st tray full detecting sensor 7-FC7 Elevator tray full detecting sensor 7-HC8 Elevator tray paper detecting sensor 2-HC9 CD aligning home position sensor 2-IC10 Shift home position sensor 2-HC11 Shift motor pulse sensor 2-HC12 Storage roller home position sensor 5-HC13 Exit roll home position sensor 7-HC14 Staple home position sensor 6-IC15 Punch motor pulse sensor 6-BC17 Front door detecting sensor 7-FC18 Upper cover detecting sensor 7-FS1 Front door sensor (RU-101) 7-BS2 Passage sensor (RU-101) 7-BWB-C Elevator tray upper limit sensor LED 7-EWB-D Elevator tray upper limit sensor PQ 5-I


4-89

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

7 8 9

7 8 9

FS-114FS-114

Symbol


Relay connector


6.7 SK-114 Overall Wiring Diagram

1

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

FS-114FS-114

Saddle Stapler 2 Needle Empty Detect Sensor

Saddle Stapler 2 Self Priming Detect Sensor

Saddle Stapler 1 Needle Empty Detect Sensor

Staple Home Position Sensor 1

Staple Home Position Sensor 2

Saddle Stapler 1 Self Priming Detect Sensor


4-90

FMMMMMPPPPPPPSP

ALL WIRING DIAGRAM

Symbol Part name LocationS-114 FS-114 4-H, 7-E8-SK Saddle exit motor 3-I9-SK Saddle exit open/close motor 3-H10-SK Crease motor 7-G13-SK In & out guide motor 3-H14-SK Layable guide motor 3-GC18-SK Saddle exit roller home position sensor 7-AC20-SK Saddle exit sensor 7-BC21-SK Saddle tray empty sensor 7-AC22-SK Crease roller home position sensor 7-HC23-SK In & out guide home position sensor 7-BC25-SK Transport pulse sensor 7-CC26-SK Layable guide home sensor 7-C4-SK Saddle interlock switch 2-DWB-C SK Main control board 3-A

K APPENDIX

Appendix-1

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

7 8 9

7 8 9

SCB

12V

4

2- 9

SG

ND

4

2- 8

-12V

4

2- 7

SG

ND

4

2- 6

12V

4

2- 5

SG

ND

4

2- 4

SG

ND

4

2- 3

5V

42-

25V

4

2- 1

-12V

3

1- 7

SG

ND

3

1- 6

12V

3

1- 5

NM

I

31-

424

V

31-

35V

V

31-

2N

.C

31-

1

SG

ND

50

0- 4

SG

ND

50

0- 3

5V

500

- 2

5V

500

- 1

26 25 24 23

Speaker

for DCPS

34-A8 SGND34-A9 OPRTS34-A10 OPRXD

34-B1 UD2

34-B7 OPRST

34-A3 UD134-A4 XSCL

34-B3 UD0

34-A1 UD334-A2 SGND

34-A5 SGND34-A6 YD34-A7 OPTXD

34-A11 SGND34-A12 OPCTS

34-B2 SGND

34-B4 LP34-B5 SGND34-B6 LCDENB

34-B8 SGND34-B9 OPINT34-B10 MONIT34-B11 5V34-B12 5V

80-A12 80-A11 80-A10 80- A9 80- A8 80- A7

80- A5 80- A4 80- A3 80- A2 80- A1

80-B12 80-B11 80-B10 80- B9 80- B8 80- B7

80- B5 80- B4 80- B3 80- B2 80- B1

80- A6

80- B6

J38-A1 -A12 J38-A2 -A11 J38-A3 -A10 J38-A4 -A9 J38-A5 -A8 J38-A6 -A7 J38-A7 -A6 J38-A8 -A5 J38-A9 -A4 J38-A10 -A3 J38-A11 -A2 J38-A12 -A1

J38-B1 -B12 J38-B2 -B11 J38-B3 -B10 J38-B4 -B9 J38-B5 -B8 J38-B6 -B7 J38-B7 -B6 J38-B8 -B5 J38-B9 -B4 J38-B10 -B3 J38-B11 -B2 J38-B12 -B1

FT

23

FT26

FT25

Thermostat

FT20 FT21

L2

TS

J13-1

RT3RT4

J21-01

J21-02

FT28

FT27L3

J21-03

FT

24

FT22

J13-4

J13-3

J13-2

J21-03

Fixing heater lamp/1

Fixing heater lamp/2

14: 1 - 214: 2 - 1

m only

Symbol


Relay connector


7. APPENDIX

7.1 7145 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/4)

1

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

AC(H)

FT3

FT4

FT5

FT6

BT1

NF

BT3

CBR 1

CBR 2

Circuit breaker/1

JAPAN AC100V 50/60Hz

EUROPE 200-240V 50HzUSA 120V 60Hz

Circuit breaker/2

AC(N)

BT2

FT2

FT1

INLE

T

DCPS

PLUG

OB

PLUG J:40LA8861

PTC

935-2935-1

PTC heater

24V 8-2

PGND 8-4

SWD24V

Interlock switch

SWD24V

SW2

31

30

SW3

J24-1A #250

J24-2A #250 J24-2B #250

J24-1B #25024V 5-1

24V 5-2J23-2

J23-1

J23-4

J23-3

83- 1 X2 - 2 Y2 - 3 X1 - 4 Y1

PAKB

- 3 DIN - 4 LP

- 9 D0 -10 D1 -11 D2 -12 D3 -13 VEE 86-14 VLCD

- 5 XSCL

- 1 DISPOFF - 2 N.C.

INV2

LCDB

BL

88- 3 - 2 - 1

89-1 FL HOT -4 FL GND

84-

3 5

V

84-

5 IN

V O

N(P

WM

) 8

4-4

SG

ND

- 8 VEE(24V) - 7 VSS(GND) - 6 VDD(5V)

85

- 5

85

- 1

85

- 2

85

- 3

84-

1 S

GN

D 8

4-2

MO

NIT

84-

9 S

CA

N6

84-

10 R

TN

3

PSW2B/SW2

85

- 4

84-

6 V

R L

84-

8 V

R H

85

- 8

85

- 7

85

- 6

84-

7 V

R S

IG

84-

12 S

GN

D 8

4-13

SW

2

84-

11 5

V

FCB

BT

6

DC PSY24V5V+12V-12V

SW1

BT

7

Main power switch

Noise filter

N.C 2-75V 2-6

24V 2-5NMI 2-412V 2-3

SGND 2-2-12V 2-1

12V 7-17

SGND 7-24

5V 7-95V 7-11

SGND 7-13SGND 7-15

SGND 7-21-12V 7-23

CN99-4 SGNDCN99-3 SGNDCN99-2 L3 CONT

BT2

BT1CN99-1 5V

CN9-1

CN9-2

CN9-3

CN9-3

J24: 2 - 2

J24: 1 - 1

24V

(C)

FT7 FT8

RL1 POWER

RL1 CNT

MAIN RL

AC(H)

AC(H)

FT9 FT10

AC(N)

AC DRIVE

BT5

L2 DRIVE

L3 DRIVE

BT4

CR001

CR002

12V 7-19

6-2 24V6-4 24V6-6 24V

8-1 24V

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

for BIAS

6-20 SGND6-18 SGND6-16 5V6-14 5V6-12 PGND6-10 PGND6-8 PGND

8-3 PGND

7-2 24V7-4 PGND7-12 5V7-16 SGND

7-22 SGND7-18 12V7-20 SGND

for CB

50

51

52

53

for SCDB

DF-318

6-1 24V6-3 24V6-5 24V

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

6-7 PGND6-9 PGND6-11 PGND6-13 5V6-15 5V6-17 SGND6-19 SGND

for FNS

1-1 5V1-2 5V

23

24

25 1-4 SGND

for OPTION

1-5 SGND26

1-3 N.C

7778

7980

8182

83

7172

7374

7576

9899

100101

102

9394

9596

97

8889

9091

92

8485

8687

J60:

1 -

1

J60:

2 -

2

7-1

24V

7-5

24V

7-6

24V

J60:

3 -

3

J60:

4 -

4

J60:

7 -

7

J60:

8 -

8

J60:

9 -

9

J60:

10 -

10

7-3

PG

ND

7-7

PG

ND

7-8

PG

ND

7-10

5V

7-14

SG

ND

- 6

- 5

7-25

RL

PW

R7-

26 R

L P

GN

D

36

37

38

39

40

32

33

34

35

DB-211DB-411

FM1

DCPS cooling fan

10-1

DR

IVE

10-2

EM

10-3

PG

ND

55

5-4 PGND5-3 PGND

3-4 24V EM3-5 FM1 EM

3-3 L3 CONT3-2 L2 CONT3-1 RL CONT

220V syste

106-

1 2

4V2

106-

2 2

4V2

106-

3 2

4V2

106-

4 P

GN

D

106-

7 L

T C

LOS

E

106-

10 M

150

CO

NT

106-

11 S

D15

1 D

RIV

E10

6-12

PS

155

106-

13 P

S15

210

6-14

PS

153

106-

15 P

S15

4

106-

19 S

GN

D10

6-18

5V

106-

17 L

CT

_TY

PE

106-

16 P

S15

1

106-

9 M

150

CLO

CK

106-

8 M

150

F/R

106-

6 M

151

DR

IVE

106-

5 P

GN

D

APPE KONICA MINOLTA 7145 Field Service Ver.2.0 Oct. 2003

Appendix-2

7.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

G

7 8 9

7 8 9

-

B58

L_A

8

-B

59 L

_A9

-

B60

L_A

10

Symbol


Relay connector

NDIX

2 7145 Overall Wiring Diagram (2/4)

1

A

B

C

D

E

F

H

I

2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

CN35CN501 CN32,33

CN47

FANBatteryCN502

HD-103 Type A DIMM PRMB

-

A11

DR

AM

_D24

-

A13

DR

AM

_D22

-

A16

DR

AM

_D19

-

A17

DR

AM

_D18

-

A18

DR

AM

_D17

-

A24

DR

AM

_D12

-

A25

DR

AM

_D11

-

A27

DR

AM

_D9

-

A44

XF

AX

_RS

T

-

A 5

DR

AM

_D30

400

-A 1

SG

ND

-

A 6

DR

AM

_D29

-

A19

DR

AM

_D16

-

A28

DR

AM

_D8

-

A33

DR

AM

_D3

-

A35

DR

AM

_D1

-

A36

DR

AM

_D0

-

A50

XIO

SE

L2

CN37 Board to Board Connector

-

B13

EX

OU

T_D

6

-

B16

EX

OU

T_D

3

-B

17 E

XO

UT

_D2

-

B18

EX

OU

T_D

1

-

B24

EX

IN_D

3

-B

25 E

XIN

_D4

-

B27

EX

IN_D

6

-

B39

MO

NIT

OR

-

B 1

SG

ND

-

B 8

XA

HA

1_IN

T

-B

9 X

EX

IN_A

CK

-

B19

EX

OU

T_D

0

-

B28

EX

IN_D

7

-

B40

XR

C_I

NT

-

B51

L_A

1

-

B56

L_A

6

-

A 3

SG

ND

-

A 2

BC

LOC

K12

-

A 4

DR

AM

_D31

-

A 7

DR

AM

_D28

-

A 8

DR

AM

_D27

-

A 9

DR

AM

_D26

-

A10

DR

AM

_D25

-

A12

DR

AM

_D23

-

A14

DR

AM

_D21

-

A15

DR

AM

_D20

-

A20

5V

-

A21

DR

AM

_D15

-

A22

DR

AM

_D14

-

A23

DR

AM

_D13

-

A26

DR

AM

_D10

-

A29

DR

AM

_D7

-

A30

DR

AM

_D6

-

A31

DR

AM

_D5

-

A32

DR

AM

_D4

-

A34

DR

AM

_D2

-

A37

5V

-

A38

SG

ND

-

A39

VB

AT

-

A40

XW

AIT

-

A41

5V

-

A42

5V

-

A43

DR

_CK

E

-

A45

XIR

ST

-

A46

XIC

S5

-

A47

XIC

S7

-

A48

XIR

D

-A

49 X

MW

R

-

A51

L_A

20

-A

52 L

_A19

-

A53

L_A

18

-A

54 L

_A17

-

A55

L_A

16

-A

56 L

_A15

-

A57

L_A

14

-A

58 L

_A13

-

A59

L_A

12

-A

60 L

_A11

-

B 2

BC

LOC

K5

-

B 3

SG

ND

-

B 5

XF

AX

_CO

AC

K

-B

4 X

FA

X_C

IAC

K

-

B 6

XF

AX

_DIA

CK

-

B 7

XF

AX

_DO

AC

K

-

B10

XE

XO

UT

_AC

K

-B

11 -

12V

-

B12

EX

OU

T_D

7

-

B14

EX

OU

T_D

5

-B

15 E

XO

UT

_D4

-

B20

5V

-

B21

EX

IN_D

0

-B

22 E

XIN

_D1

-

B23

EX

IN_D

2

-

B26

EX

IN_D

5

-

B29

XF

AX

_DR

IVE

-

B30

XE

XO

UT

_RE

Q

-B

31 X

EX

IN_R

EQ

-

B32

XIC

S6

-

B33

XF

AX

_DO

RE

Q

-B

34 X

FA

X_D

IRE

Q

-B

35 X

FA

X_C

OR

EQ

-

B36

XF

AX

_CIR

EQ

-

B37

5V

-

B38

SG

ND

-

B41

12V

-

B42

PD

A7

-

B43

PD

A6

-

B44

PD

A5

-

B45

PD

A4

-

B46

PD

A3

-

B47

PD

A2

-

B48

PD

A1

-

B49

PD

A0

-

B50

L_A

0

-

B52

L_A

2

-B

53 L

_A3

-

B54

L_A

4

-B

55 L

_A5

-

B57

L_A

7

FK-102/FL-102

-

13 S

LCT

-

15 N

.C.

-

16 S

GN

D

-17

SG

ND

-

19 S

GN

D

-20

SG

ND

-

19 S

GN

D

-22

SG

ND

-

10 A

CK

-

11 B

US

Y

-

28 S

GN

D

-29

SG

ND

-

31 IN

T

-

33 S

GN

D

-34

N.C

.

-35

N.C

.

-

27 S

GN

D

-

23 S

GN

D

-24

SG

ND

-

25 S

GN

D

-26

SG

ND

40-

1 S

TR

OB

E

- 2

DA

TA

0

- 3

DA

TA

1

- 4

DA

TA

2

- 5

DA

TA

3

- 6

DA

TA

4

- 7

DA

TA

5

- 8

DA

TA

6

- 9

DA

TA

7

-

12 P

E

-

32 F

AU

LT

-

14 A

UT

OF

D

-

18 N

.C

-

30 H

LOG

IC

-

36 S

ELE

CT

IN

432

-B2

DA

CLK

432

-B1

LO

AD

432

-B3

DI

432

-B8

SG

ND

J53:

B11

- B

2

J53:

B10

- B

3

J53:

B9

- B

4

J53:

B8

- B

5

J53:

B7

- B

6

J53:

B6

- B

7

J53:

B5

- B

8

J53:

B4

- B

9

J53:

B2

- B

11

J53:

B1

- B

12

J53:

A4

- A

9

432

-A5

SG

ND

432

-A8

+5V

RN

432

-A10

-V

IDE

O2

432

-A12

SG

ND

J53:

A12

- A

1

J53:

A11

- A

2

J53:

A10

- A

3

J53:

A9

- A

4

J53:

A8

- A

5

J53:

A7

- A

6

J53:

A6

- A

7

J53:

A5

- A

8

J53:

A3

- A

10

J53:

A2

- A

11

J53:

B12

- B

1

432

-A1

/E

NB

1J5

3: A

1 -

A12

J53:

B3

- B

10

432

-A4

/S

/H1

432

-A2

/A

LM1

432

-A3

/B

IAS

432

-A6

LD

+5V

432

-A7

LD

+5V

432

-A9

SG

ND

432

-A11

+V

IDE

O2

432

-B4

SG

ND

432

-B5

/A

LM2

432

-B6

/S

/H2

432

-B7

/A

LM_R

ST

432

-B9

SG

ND

432

-B10

-V

IDE

O1

432

-B11

+V

IDE

O1

432

-B12

SG

ND

J52:

1 -

5

J52:

2 -

4

J52:

3 -

3

J52:

4 -

2

J52:

5 -

1

431

- 4

SG

ND

431

- 2

SG

ND

431

- 1

**

431

- 3

/IH

SE

NS

E

431

- 5

ID

PR

+5V

-39

AP

R

-48

12V

-43

5V

ADB

-31

+A

D_D

1

-14

SG

ND

-18

SG

ND

-20

SC

LOC

K

-12

+R

CK

60-

1 S

GN

D

- 3

CLA

MP

- 5

BC

LAM

P

-13

-R

CK

-15

SG

ND

-19

SC

LOC

K

-22

SD

I -

23 S

DO

-26

-A

D_D

0

-42

5V

-44

5V

-47

12V

-49

12V

46

-37

46

-38

46

-39

46

-41

46

-42

46

-31

46

-27

46

-14

46

-15

46

-16

46

-18

46

-19

46

-20

46

-22

46

-23

46

-21

46

-17

46

- 1

46

- 2

46

- 3

46

- 5

46

- 6

46

- 7

46

- 9

46

-10

46

-11

46

-13

46

-12

46

- 8

46

- 4

46

-43

46

-45

46

-46

46

-47

46

-49

46

-50

46

-48

46

-44

46

-40

46

-24

46

-25

46

-26

46

-28

46

-29

46

-30

46

-32

46

-33

46

-34

46

-36

46

-35

- 2

TG

- 4

AC

LAM

P

- 6

SG

ND

- 7

SG

ND

- 8

+T

CK

- 9

-T

CK

-10

SG

ND

-11

SG

ND

-16

+IN

_CLO

CK

-17

-IN

_CLO

CK

-21

*S

EN

-24

SG

ND

-25

SG

ND

-27

+A

D_D

0 -

28 S

GN

D -

29 S

GN

D -

30 -

AD

_D1

-32

SG

ND

-33

SG

ND

-34

-O

UT

_CLO

CK

-35

+O

UT

_CLO

CK

-36

SG

ND

-37

SG

ND

-38

AD

RS

T

-40

SG

ND

-41

5V

-46

12V

-45

SG

ND

-50

SG

ND

127128

129130

131

122123

124125

126115

116

117118

119120

121

110111

112113

114103

104

105106

107108

109

HOLSTEIN

PONY

MPC8245

SCB

K APPENDIX

Appendix-3

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

7 8 9

7 8 9

26-A

16 S

GN

D

M3

26-A

17 5

V

26-A

11 N

.C26

-A10

PG

ND

26-A

9 P

GN

D26

-A8

24V

26-A

7 2

4V

26-A

15 C

ON

T26

-A14

CLO

CK

26-A

12 L

D26

-A13

N.C

Developing motor

904

-1

-

2

-

3

M 5

Polygon motor

-

4

-

5

J51:

1 -

5

J51:

2 -

4

J51:

3 -

3

J51:

4 -

2

J51:

5 -

1

CLO

CK

22-

5LO

CK

22-

4D

RIV

E 2

2-3

PG

ND

22-

224

V 2

2-1

J54:

1 -

5

J54:

2 -

4

J54:

3 -

3

J54:

4 -

2

J54:

5 -

1

PCL

Pre-charging lamp

J15:

2 -

12

J15:

1 -

13

D

RIV

E 2

6-B

17

24V

26-

B16

J16

-12

J16

-18

932:

2 -

1

932:

1 -

2

M8

907-

1

-2

Tray motor/L

26-B

4 2

4V26

-B3

DR

IVE

M7

Tray motor/U

906-

1

-2

26-B

2 2

4V26

-B1

DR

IVE

910:

3 -

1

910:

2 -

2

910:

1 -

3

FM4

26-A

2 E

M26

-A3

PG

ND

26-A

1 D

RIV

E

Internal cooling fan/1

DF-318

24V24V

5VSGND

PGNDPGND

132

133

134

135

136

137

5V

-1

S.G

-2

CO

NT

-3

CLK

-4

CW

/CC

W-5

LD

-6

H/L

-7

P.G

-8

P.G

-9

24V

-10

24V

-11

FM3

912:

3 -

1

912:

2 -

2

912:

1 -

3

Internal dehumidifying fan/1

29-A

2 E

M

J38:

3 -

4

J38:

2 -

5

29-A

1 D

RIV

E

29-A

3 P

GN

D

J38:

1 -

6

913:

3 -

1

913:

2 -

2

913:

1 -

3

FM5

Developing suction fan

26-A

5 E

M26

-A6

PG

ND

26-A

4 D

RIV

E

914:

3 -

1

914:

2 -

2

914:

1 -

3

ternal ehumidifying n/2

FM6

29-A

5 E

M

J38:

6 -

1

J38:

5 -

2

J38:

4 -

3

29-A

6 P

GN

D

29-A

4 D

RIV

E

68-

A9

68-

A7

68-

A10

M30

1 F

/R 1

7-A

3M

301

EM

17-

A4

M30

1 R

ST

17-

A5

M30

1 R

TN

17-

A6

SD

301

DR

IVE

17-

A8

SG

ND

17-

A7

PS

301

17-

A9

PS

304

17-

A12

PS

305

17-

A13

SD

302

DR

IVE

17-

B9

PS

306

17-

B6

PS

308

17-

B7

PS

309

17-

B8

M30

3 F

/R 1

7-B

13M

303

EM

17-

B14

M30

1 C

LOC

K 1

7-A

1S

GN

D 1

7-A

2

PS

302

17-

A10

PS

303

17-

A11

M30

3 V

0 1

7-B

4M

303

V1

17-

B5

M30

2 V

0 1

7-B

2M

302

V1

17-

B3

68-

A6

68-

A11

6

8-A

12

68-

A13

6

8-A

14

68-

A15

6

8-A

16

68-

A17

6

8-A

18

68-

B16

6

8-B

17

M30

1 V

0 1

7-B

1

BR

301

17-

A14

68-

A5

201:

A5

- A

14

201:

A6

- A

13

201:

A7

- A

12

201:

A8

- A

11

201:

A18

- A

1

201:

A17

- A

2

201:

A16

- A

3

201:

A15

- A

4

201:

A14

- A

5

201:

A13

- A

6

201:

A12

- A

7

201:

A11

- A

8

201:

A10

- A

9

201:

A9

- A

10

201:

B5

- B

14

201:

B6

- B

13

201:

B7

- B

12

201:

B8

- B

11

201:

B10

- B

9

201:

B9

- B

10

201:

B11

- B

8

201:

B12

- B

7

201:

B13

- B

6

201:

B14

- B

5

201:

B15

- B

4

201:

B16

- B

3

201:

B17

- B

2

201:

B18

- B

1

M30

2 E

M 1

7-B

15S

GN

D 1

7-B

16M

302

CLO

CK

17-

B17

68-

B2

6

8-B

3

68-

B4

201:

B2

- B

17

201:

B3

- B

16

201:

B4

- B

15

68-

A4

SD

303

CO

NT

17-

A15

FM

301

CO

NT

17-

A16

FM

301

EM

17-

A17

201:

A2

- A

17

201:

A3

- A

16

201:

A4

- A

15

SG

ND

17-

B10

M30

3 C

LOC

K 1

7-B

11S

GN

D 1

7-B

12

68-

A2

6

8-A

3

68-

B5

6

8-B

6 6

8-B

7 6

8-B

8 6

8-B

9 6

8-B

10

68-

B11

6

8-B

12

68-

B13

68-

B15

68-

B18

SG

ND

17-

B18

201:

B1

- B

18

201:

A1

- A

185V

17-

A18

68-

A1

68-

B1

68-

B14

68-

A8

ctor Fastonelay connector


7.3 7145 Overall Wiring Diagram (3/4)

1

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

FUSING UNIT

Fixingtemperature sensor/1

Fixing temperature sensor/2

951-

1

PS 2

-3

-2

Fixing exit sensor

J13:

A4

- A

1

J13:

A3

- A

2

J13:

A2

- A

3

J13:

A1

- A

4

J12:

9 -

1

J12:

8 -

2

J12:

7 -

3

J12:

6 -

4

J13:

B4

- B

1

J13:

B3

- B

2

J13:

B2

- B

3

J12:

5 -

5

J12:

4 -

6

J12:

3 -

7

TH

1 A

NG

18-

6

SG

ND

18-

7

TH

2 A

NG

18-

8

S

GN

D 1

8-10

PS

18-

11

S

GN

D 1

8- 9

980:

1 -

1

980:

2 -

2

980:

3 -

3

980:

4 -

4

J18:

1 -

3

J18:

2 -

2

J18:

3 -

1

N

.C 1

8-14

N

.C 1

8-13

J12:

2 -

8

J12:

1 -

9

N

.C 1

8-12

TH1 TH2

35-1

35-2

35-4

35-3

-10

PG

ND

COPY VENDER

35-5

-8

/C

PF

0 -

9 /

CP

F1

-4

VE

N.R

XD

-3

VE

N.C

TS

-6

VE

N.R

TS

37-1

V

EN

.TX

D

36-1

/M

1 -

2 /

PF

-3

/P

S0

-4

/P

S1

-5

/P

S2

-6

/P

S3

-7

/S

IDE

-2

PG

ND

-5

(N

.C)

-7

PG

ND

-8

5V

FM2

J28:

3 -

1

J28:

2 -

2

J28:

1 -

3

911:

3 -

1

911:

2 -

2

911:

1 -

3

Fixing cooling fan

18-

4 L

OC

K18

- 5

PG

ND

18-

3 D

RIV

E

24V

21-

6

P

GN

D 2

1- 5

5V

21-

4

S

GN

D 2

1- 3

SG

ND

21-

2

1

2V 2

1- 1

M1

23-A

1 2

4V

23-A

11 5

V

23-A

8 C

LOC

K23

-A9

CO

NT

23-A

6 L

OC

K

23-A

2 2

4V

Main motor

23-A

10 S

GN

D

23-A

4 P

GN

D23

-A3

PG

ND

23-A

7 S

GN

D

-

329

-B14

SG

ND

TLD

Toner level sensor

984

-1

-

2J0

5:3

- 1

J05:

2 -

2

J05:

1 -

3

29-B

16 5

V29

-B15

TLD

AN

G

Toner supply motor/2

915:

6 -

1

915:

5 -

2

915:

4 -

3

915:

3 -

4

915:

2 -

5

915:

1 -

6

M10

29-A

14 B

29-A

13 B

29-A

16 2

4V

29-A

11 A

29-A

12 A

29-A

15 2

4V

954

-1

-

2

-

329

-B12

PS

Toner bottle sensor

PS 5

J06:

3 -

1

J06:

2 -

2

J06:

1 -

3

29-B

13 5

V

29-B

11 S

GN

D

SD4

Cleaning web solenoid

925

:2 -

1

925

:1 -

2

J29

:2 -

1

J29

:1 -

229

-A7

DR

IVE

29-A

8 2

4V

SD5

926

:2 -

1

1

- 2

ADU gate solenoid

29-B

8 2

4V29

-B7

DR

IVE

-2

-1

92-

7

-6

-5

-4

-3

Toner control sensor board

Toner density sensor

5

V 2

6-B

7

J15:

5 -

9

J15:

6 -

8

J15:

7 -

7

J15:

8 -

6

J15:

9 -

5

J15:

11 -

3

J15:

10 -

4 J

16-2

J16

-3

J16

-4 J

16-5

J16

-6

J16

-7

J16

-8J1

1: 1

- 7

J11:

2 -

6

J11:

3 -

5

J11:

4 -

4

J11:

5 -

3

J11:

7 -

1

J11:

6 -

2

T

NR

IF 2

6-B

10

TN

OU

T1

26-

B11

T

NO

UT

2 2

6-B

12

SG

ND

26-

B13

1

2V 2

6-B

9

DR

UM

.TH

26-

B8

SD7

Separationclaw solenoid

928:

2 -

1

928:

1 -

2

J15:

4 -

10

J15:

3 -

11

2

4V 2

6-B

15

DR

IVE

26-

B14

J16

-15

J16

-16

983

-1

-

2

-

4

J17

-2

J17

-3

-

5

J17

-5

J17

-9

-3

TDSTCSB

C

ON

T 2

5-A

1

12V

25-

A2

T

DS

AN

G 2

5-A

3

SG

ND

25-

A4

J14:

5 -

2

J14:

6 -

1

J14:

4 -

3

J14:

3 -

4

N

.C 2

5-A

5

N.C

25-

A6

J14:

2

J14:

1

J16-

20

to BIAS

72-

5

CHARGER

Separation TransferG

RID

HV

J16-

1172

- 1

FT

36F

T37

FT

38F

T39

FT

34

FT

31F

T32

FT

33

FT

30

FT

40

FT

35to GUIDE PLATE

S

GN

D 2

7- 6

H

UM

1 A

NG

27-

7

5V

27-

8J0

9-9

J09-

8

J09-

770

- 3

70-

2

70-

1

73-

3

73-

2

73-

1

N

.C 2

7- 5

Registration clutch

MC1

920:

2 -

1

920:

1 -

229

-A9

24V

29-A

10 D

RIV

E

110-

1911

0-18

110-

1711

0-16

110-

1511

0-14

110-

1311

0-12

110-

11

110-

911

0- 8

110-

711

0- 6

110-

511

0- 4

110-

311

0- 2

110-

1

110-

10

300:A10- A10300:A9 - A9300:A8 - A8300:A7 - A7300:A6 - A6300:A5 - A5300:A4 - A4300:A3 - A3300:A2 - A2300:A1 - A1300:A11- A11

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

24V24V24VPGNDPGNDPGND5V5VSGNDSGND

for DCPS

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

7778

7980

8182

83

7172

7374

7576

8485

8687

9899

100101

102

9394

9596

97

8889

9091

92

SGNDFS SIN

SGNDSGND

60

FS CTSSGNDN.C

FS RTSN.CSGNDFS SOUT

300:B11- B11300:B10- B10300:B9 - B9300:B8 - B8300:B7 - B7300:B6 - B6300:B5 - B5300:B4 - B4300:B3 - B3300:B2 - B2300:B1 - B1

for ENGINE

FS-112FS-113

N

.C 2

6-B

5

N.C

26-

B6

J15:

12 -

2

J15:

13 -

1 J

16-1

3

J16

-14

70-

7

24V1PGND

70-

9

70-

8

B.S

IG 2

7- 2

B.C

ON

T 2

7- 1

forDCPS

24V

27-

4

P

GN

D 2

7- 3

70-

5

70-

4

70-

6

12

11

J25

-4

J17-8 J17-11J25-2J0

9-6

J09-

5

J09-

4

J09-

3

J09-

2

J09-

1

J17-

12J1

7-7

J25-

5J2

5-1

SD

C.S

IG 1

5-A

2S

.FB

15-

A1

71-

1

71-

2

71-

3

71-

4

71-

7

71-

9

71-1

0

71-1

1

71-1

2

71-

8

71-

6

71-

5

J10:

12 -

1

J10:

11 -

2

J10:

10 -

3

J10:

9 -

4

J10:

8 -

5

J10:

7 -

6

J10:

6 -

7

J10:

5 -

8

J10:

4 -

9

J10:

3 -

10

J10:

2 -

11

J10:

1 -

12

SA

C.S

IG 1

5-A

3S

.CO

NT

15-

A4

T.F

B 1

5-A

5T

.SIG

15-

A6

T.C

ON

T 1

5-A

7G

.CO

NT

15-

A8

C.F

B 1

5-A

9G

RID

.SIG

15-

A10

CH

G.S

IG 1

5-A

11C

.CO

NT

15-

A12

M9

23-B

11 2

4V

23-B

1 5

V

23-B

3 C

ON

T

23-B

10 2

4V

23-B

4 C

LOC

K23

-B5

F/R

Paper feed motor

M11

Fixing motor

41-1

24V

41-2

24V

41-8

CLO

CK

41-9

CO

NT

41-1

1 5V

41-6

LO

CK

S.G

-2

CO

NT

-3

CLK

-4

LD

-6

H/L

-7

P.G

-8

P.G

-9

24V

-1

1

CW

/CC

W-5

24V

-10

5V

-1

S.G

-2

CO

NT

-3

CLK

-4

LD

-6

H/L

-7

P.G

-8

P.G

-9

24V

-1

1

CW

/CC

W-5

24V

-10

5V

-1

S.G

-2

CO

NT

-3

CLK

-4

LD

-6

H/L

-7

P.G

-8

P.G

-9

24V

-1

1

CW

/CC

W-5

24V

-10

5V

-1

41-7

(N

.C.)

41-5

(N

.C.)

23-B

2 S

GN

D

23-B

6 S

GN

D

23-B

8 P

GN

D23

-B9

PG

ND

41-1

0 S

GN

D

41-4

PG

ND

41-3

PG

ND

DEV UNIT DRUM CARTRIGE

Toner supply motor/1

M4

903:

6 -

1

903:

5 -

2

903:

4 -

3

903:

3 -

4

903:

2 -

5

903:

1 -

629

-B1

A

29-B

6 2

4V

29-B

2 A

29-B

5 2

4V

29-B

3 B

29-B

4 B

Indfa

Humidity sensor

982-1

-2

-3

HUM1

SD9

929

:2 -

1

929

:1 -

218

- 2

24V

18-

1 D

RIV

E

Toner solenoid

986-

2

986-

1

TC

Total counter

29-B

9 2

4V29

-B10

DR

IVE

24V

20-

1

2

4V 2

0- 2

PG

ND

20-

3

P

GN

D 2

0- 4

3130

for SW3EUROPE onlyfor FCB

50 51 52 53

FM

1 E

M 2

5-A

7

24V

EM

25-

A8

L3

CO

NT

25-

A9

L2

CO

NT

25-

A10

RL

CO

NT

25-

A11

L3 C

ON

T 4

0- 3

SG

ND

40-

1

S

GN

D 4

0- 2

5V

40-

4

LT-203

CB

Symbol

CrimpConne

R


Appendix-4

7.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

C

D

G

H

7 8 9

7 8 9

910:

4 -

1

910:

3 -

2

910:

2 -

3

FM7

Internal cooling fan/2

910:

1 -

439

-1 D

RIV

E39

-2 E

M

39-4

SG

ND

39-3

H/L

SG

ND

28-

B1

5V S

YS

28-

B2

SG

ND

28-

B3

44-

B9

44-

B11

4

4-B

10

-B33 PCI_C_BE0

-B12 PCI_AD29

-B16 PCI_C_BE3

-B20 PCI_AD18

-B26 PCI_C_BE1

-B31 PCI_AD8

-A20 PCI_AD17 -A21 PCI_C_BE2

-A26 PCI_AD15

38-B 1 XFAN -B 2 FANHI

-B 9 XPCI_REQ0

-B19 PCI_AD20

CN

38 Board to B

oard Connector(100pin)

A24 XPCI_DEVSEL

38-A 1 XFAN_LK -A 2 SGND

-A 4 SGND

-A 6 SGND -A 7 SGND -A 8 SGND

-A13 SGND

-A18 SGND

-A27 SGND

-A32 SGND

-A37 SGND -A38 SGND

-A44 SGND

-A46 SGND

-A48 SGND -A49 SGND

-A14 26/ISEL6

-A19 PCI_AD19

-A22 PCI_IRDY -A23 SGND

-A25 PAR

-A28 PCI_AD13 -A29 PCI_AD11 -A30 PCI_AD9 -A31 PCI_AD7

-A33 PCI_AD6 -A34 PCI_AD4 -A35 PCI_AD2 -A36 PCI_AD0

-A39 5V -A40 5V -A41 5V -A42 5V -A43 5V

-A45 -12V

-A47 12V

-A50 12V

-B 4 SGND -B 5 SGND -B 6 SGND

-B 8 SGND

-B13 SGND

-B18 SGND

-B23 SGND

-B27 SGND

-B32 SGND

-B37 SGND -B38 SGND

-B44 SGND

-B46 SGND

-B48 SGND -B49 SGND

-B 7 BCLOCK3

-B11 PCI_AD31

-B14 PCI_AD27 -B15 PCI_AD25

-B17 PCI_AD22

-B21 PCI_AD16-B22 XPCI_FRAME

-B24 XPCI_TRDY -B25 XPCI_STOP

-B28 PCI_AD14 -B29 PCI_AD12 -B30 PCI_AD10

-B34 PCI_AD5 -B35 PCI_AD3 -B36 PCI_AD1

-B39 5V -B40 5V -B41 5V -B42 5V -B43 5V

-B45 -12V

-B47 12V

-B50 12V

-A 3 NC

-A 5 /RST

-A 9 /GNT2 -A10 NC

-A11 PCI_AD30 -A12 PCI_AD28

-A15 PCI_AD24 -A16 PCI_AD23 -A17 PCI_AD21

-B 3 N.C

-B10 N.C

for DB UNIT

J61

: 1 -

9

J61

: 2 -

8

J61

: 3 -

7

J61

: 4 -

6

J61

: 5 -

5

J61

: 6 -

4

J61

: 7 -

3

J61

: 8 -

2

J61

: 9 -

1

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

19-

1 D

B_R

TS

19-

4 D

B_C

TS

19-

2 S

.GN

D19

- 3

DB

_RX

D

19-

5 S

GN

D19

- 6

DB

_TX

D19

- 7

DB

_EX

IT19

- 8

LC

T_E

XIT

19-

9 D

B_R

ST

IP-432

973

-1

-

2

-

3

PS24

IT exit sensor/L

(CE1)

IT-101SD8

939:

1 -

2

939:

2 -

1J4

2:8

- 8

J42:

9 -

9

Gate solenoid

38-

6 2

4V38

- 7

DR

IVE

Symbol


Relay connector

NDIX

4 7145 Overall Wiring Diagram (4/4)

1

A

B

E

F

I

2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

TSL

Transfersynchro-nization lamp

933

:2 -

1

1

- 2

J02:

2 -

6

J02:

1 -

724

-A15

DR

IVE

24-A

15 S

GN

DCB

US

BLA

N

- 3 TXD

39- 1 DCD - 2 RXD

- 4 DTR - 5 GND - 6 DSR - 7 RTS - 8 CTS

KR

DS

I/F

- 9 RI

BYPASS TRAY

966-

3

-2

-1

PS17

APS sensor

64-2

P

S64

-1

5V

64-3

S

GN

D

64-4

S

GN

D

64-6

5V

964-

3

-2

-1

PS15

APS timingsensor

64-5

P

S

64-7

S

GN

D

64-9

5V

963-

3

-2

-1

Scanner home position sensor

PS14

64-8

P

S

M2

-2

V

Scanner motor

62-1

U

-3

W

931-

4

-3

930-

1 L.

V.

-3

H.V

.

Exposure lamp

INV1

L1

63-1

24V

-1

63-2

L1

CO

NT

63-3

L1

EM

63-4

PG

ND

96-1

96-3

97-3

97-1

-2

PGND 60- 2N.C 60- 35V 60- 4

SGND 60- 5 J20: 2 - 9

J20: 4 - 7

J20: 7 - 4 4

7

9

1

for DC

PS

24V 60- 1

2

3

5

6

8

10

for DC

PS

J20:10 - 1

SD2

1st paper feed solenoid/L

923:

2 -

1

923:

1 -

225

-A14

24V

25-A

15 D

RIV

E

959

-1

-

3

-

2

Upper limit sensor/L

J03:

11 -

1

J03:

10 -

2

J03:

9 -

3

PS 10

24-A

13 5

V

24-A

11 S

GN

D

(J03

:CT

)

24-A

12 P

S

960

-1

-

3

-

2

No paper sensor/U

J03:

8 -

4

J03:

7 -

5

J03:

6 -

6

PS 11

24-A

10 5

V

24-A

8 S

GN

D24

-A9

PS

Tray set sensor/L

961

-1

-

2

-

3

PS 12

25-B

15 5

V

25-B

13 S

GN

D

J32:

3 -

1

J32:

2 -

2

J32:

1 -

325

-B14

PS

956

-1

-

3

-

2

Upper limit sensor

J01:

3 -

7

J01:

2 -

8

J01:

1 -

925

-B5

PS

PS 7

25-B

6 5

V

25-B

4 S

GN

D

957

-1

-

3

-

2

No paper sensor

J01:

6 -

4

J01:

5 -

5

J01:

4 -

625

-B8

PS

PS 8

25-B

7 S

GN

D

25-B

9 5

V

Tray set sensor/U

958

-1

-

2

-

325

-B17

PS

PS 9

25-B

16 S

GN

D

25-B

18 5

VJ3

1:3

- 1

J31:

2 -

2

J31:

1 -

3

25-B

11 P

S

Registration sensor

J01:

9 -

1

J01:

8 -

2

J01:

7 -

3

25-B

12 5

V

25-B

10 S

GN

D

950

-1

-

2

-

3

PS 1

J33:

3 -

1

J33:

2 -

2

J33:

1 -

3

MC2

Loop clutch

921:

2 -

1

921:

1 -

224

-A1

24V

24-A

2 D

RIV

ESD3

By-passpaper feedsolenoid

24-B

20 2

4V92

4: 2

- 1

924:

1 -

2J0

4:11

- 1

J04:

10 -

224

-B19

DR

IVE

By-passno papersensor

24-B

11 P

S

J04:

3 -

9

PS13

962

-1

-2

-3

24-B

12 5

V

24-B

10 S

GN

D

J04:

2 -

10

J04:

1 -

11

M6

905:

6 -

1

905:

5 -

2

905:

4 -

3

905:

3 -

4

905:

2 -

5

905:

1 -

624

-B1

A

24-B

6 2

4V

24-B

2 A

24-B

5 2

4V

24-B

3 B

24-B

4 B

ADU motor

24-B

8 P

S

ADU sensor

-3

-2

953

-1

PS 4

24-B

9 5

V

24-B

7 S

GN

D

J30:

3 - 1

J30:

2 - 2

J30:

1 - 3

RT3RT3

200: 1 - 1200: 2 - 2200: 3 - 3200: 4 - 4200: 5 - 5200: 6 - 6 20: 9 - 2

20: 8 - 3 20: 6 - 5 20: 5 - 6 20: 3 - 8 20: 1 - 10

50-B

12

-B

11

-B

10

- B

9

- B

8

- B

7

- B

6

- B

4

- B

3

- B

2

- B

5

J50:

B1

- B

12

J50:

B2

- B

11

J50:

B4

- B

9

J50:

B5

- B

8

J50:

B6

- B

7

J50:

B7

- B

6

J50:

B8

- B

5

J50:

B9

- B

4

J50:

B10

- B

3

J50:

B11

- B

2

LDB

-A

11

-A

10

- A

9

- A

8

- A

7

- A

6

- A

5

- A

3

- A

2

- A

1

- A

4

J50:

A4

- A

9

J50:

A12

- A

1

J50:

A11

- A

2

J50:

A10

- A

3

J50:

A9

- A

4

J50:

A8

- A

5

J50:

A7

- A

6

J50:

A6

- A

7

J50:

A5

- A

8

J50:

A3

- A

10

J50:

A2

- A

11

- B

1J5

0:B

12 -

B1

50-A

12J5

0: A

1 -

A12

J50:

B3

- B

10

45-1 VDD

45-4 SGND

45-2 -Data 45-3 +Data

41-1 TX+ 41-2 TX- 41-3 RX+ 41-4 NC 41-5 NC 41-6 RX- 41-7 NC 41-8 NC 41-9 FG

41-11 VDD1 41-10 FG

41-11 LED1 41-11 VDD2 41-11 LED2

-2

-3

-4

-5

51-

1

INDEX

(CN

51

44-

A3

4

4-A

4

44-

A8

44-

A11

44-

A1

4

4-A

2

44-

A5

4

4-A

6

44-

A7

44-

A9

4

4-A

10

44-

B1

B V

V 2

8-A

1T

ON

YY

28-

A2

P V

V 2

8-A

3S

VV

28-

A4

SG

ND

28-

A6

EE

VV

28-

A5

EG

TR

S 2

8-A

7E

G T

XD

28-

A8

EG

CT

S 2

8-A

9E

G R

XD

28-

A10

SG

ND

28-

A11

DD

F V

V 2

8-B

11N

.C 2

8-B

10

EG

INT

28-

B5

EG

RS

T 2

8-B

4

PS

301

28-

B6

AP

S T

IM 2

8-B

7 4

4-B

4

44-

B7

4

4-B

8

FIX

OK

28-

B9

SG

ND

28-

B8

44-

B6

4

4-B

5

44-

B3

4

4-B

2

SCDB RASCAL2

-

132

133

134

135

136

137

127128

129130

131

122123

124125

126115

116

117118

119120

121

110111

112113

114103

104

105106

107108

109

SPIC

GENESYS2

DG01

L1INVB

24-B

17 P

S

J04:

9 -

3

J04:

8 -

4

J04:

7 -

5

PS20

969

-1

-2

-3

24-B

18 5

V

24-B

16 S

GN

D

By-passtray paper size sensor

J08:

6 -

1

J08:

5 -

2

J08:

4 -

3

J04:

6 -

6

J04:

5 -

7

J04:

4 -

8

VR1

98

-3

-2

-1

By-passtray paper size VR

24-B

15 S

GN

D

24-B

13 5

V

J08:

3 -

4

J08:

2 -

5

J08:

1 -

624

-B14

VR

25-A

17 P

S

J41:

1 -

3

J41:

2 -

2

J41:

3 -

1

25-A

16 5

V

25-A

18 S

GN

D

971

-1

-

2

-

3

PS22

Timing sensor/L

25-B

2 P

S

J40:

1 -

3

J40:

2 -

2

J40:

3 -

1

25-B

1 5

V

25-B

3 S

GN

D

970

-1

-

2

-

3

PS21

Timing sensor/U

DR

IVE

35-

4S

GN

D 3

5- 5

SG

ND

35-

3S

IG 3

5- 2

24V

35-

1

985

A-3

-

1

-

2

-

4

CN985A

CN985B

985

B-1

985

B-2

Key counterKC(Option)

J26:

2 -

3

J26:

4 -

1

J26:

1 -

4

J26:

3 -

2

For Finisher

J42:

2 -

2

J42:

3 -

3

972

-1

-

2

-

3

PS23

IT exit sensor/U

J42:

5 -

5

J42:

6 -

6

974

-1

-

2

-

3

PS25

IT door sensor

38-

1 P

S38

- 2

SG

ND

38-

8 S

GN

DJ4

2:10

- 10

J42:

11-

11

J42:

4 -

438

- 3

5V

(CE1)

(CE1)

38-

5 S

GN

D

38-

9 IT

.SE

T

38-

4 P

S

1st paper feed solenoid/U

SD1

922:

2 -

1

922:

1 -

225

-A13

24V

25-A

12 D

RIV

E

SG

ND

16-

105V

16-

11P

S17

16-

12P

S15

16-

13P

S14

16-

14

M2

DR

IVE

16-

5M

2 E

M2

16-

4

M2

V0

16-

6M

2 V

1 1

6- 7

61-

11 6

1-12

M2

CLO

CK

16-

1S

GN

D 1

6- 2

M2

EM

1 1

6- 3

L1 C

ON

T 1

6- 8

L1 E

M 1

6- 9

61-

4

61-

7

61-

8

61-

9

61-

10

61-

13 6

1-14

61-

15

61-

6

61-

5

61-

3

61-

2

5V 1

6-15

61-

1

FS

TX

D 1

5-B

1S

GN

D 1

5-B

2

FS

RT

S 1

5-B

4

FS

RX

D 1

5-B

6S

GN

D 1

5-B

5

SG

ND

15-

B8

FS

CT

S 1

5-B

9

70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60

SG

ND

15-

B10

SG

ND

15-

B11

N.C

15-

B12

N.C

15-

B3

N.C

15-

B7

90-

1

-

2

-

4

-

3

-

5

PFDB/U

J02:

7 -

1

J02:

6 -

2

J02:

5 -

3

24-A

16 S

IZE

.UP

.D24

-A17

SIZ

E.U

P.C

24-A

18 S

IZE

.UP

.B24

-A19

SIZ

E.U

P.A

J02:

3 -

5

J02:

4 -

4

24-A

20 S

GN

D

91-

1

-

2

-

4

-

3

-

5

PFDB/L

J03:

5 -

7

J03:

4 -

8

J03:

3 -

9

J03:

2 -

10

J03:

1 -

11

24-A

6 S

IZE

.LO

W.A

24-A

5 S

IZE

.LO

W.B

24-A

4 S

IZE

.LO

W.C

24-A

3 S

IZE

.LO

W.D

24-A

7 S

GN

D

for KC

SCB

K APPENDIX

Appendix-5

Symbol Part name Location

PS24 IT exit sensor /L Appendix-4 7-I

PS25 IT door sensor Appendix-4 6-I

TH1 Fixing temperature sensor /1 Appendix-3 5-E

TH2 Fixing temperature sensor /2 Appendix-3 5-E

HUM1 Humidity sensor Appendix-3 4-D

TDS Toner density sensor Appendix-3 6-E

TLD Toner level sensor Appendix-3 5-I

TS Thermostat Appendix-1 8-A

SW1 Main power switch Appendix-1 4-C

SW2 Sub power switch Appendix-1 6-I

SW3 Interlock switch Appendix-1 5-E

VR1 By-pass tray paper size VR Appendix-4 3-I

PTC PTC heater Appendix-1 6-E

BATTERY Battery Appendix-2 1-G


Symbol Part name Location Symbol Part name Location

COPY VENDER COPY VENDER Appendix-3 1-I M2 Scanner motor Appendix-4 2-D

DB-211 DB-211 Appendix-1 2-G M3 Developing motor Appendix-3 8-I

DB-411 DB-411 Appendix-1 2-G M4 Toner supply motor /1 Appendix-3 6-I

DIMM DIMM Appendix-2 3-F M5 Polygon motor Appendix-3 7-D

FK-102/FL-102 FK-102/FL-102 Appendix-2 3-A M6 ADU motor Appendix-4 4-H

FS-112 FS-112 Appendix-3 4-A M7 Tray motor /U Appendix-3 8-I

FS-113 FS-113 Appendix-3 4-A M8 Tray motor /L Appendix-3 7-I

HD-103 Type A HD-105 Appendix-2 1-F M9 Paper feed motor Appendix-3 7-I

IP-432 IP-432 Appendix-4 7-A M10 Toner supply motor /2 Appendix-3 6-I

IT-101 IT-101 Appendix-4 6-I M11 Fixing motor Appendix-3 3-I

KC Key counter Appendix-4 3-E FM1 DCPS cooling fan Appendix-1 4-F

LT-203 LT-203 Appendix-3 2-A FM2 Fixing cooling fan Appendix-3 4-I

TC Total counter Appendix-3 5-I FM3 Internal dehumidifying fan /1 Appendix-3 7-I

DF-318 DF-318 Appendix-3 7-A FM4 Internal cooling fan /1 Appendix-3 9-I

ADB A/D conversion board Appendix-2 1-C FM5 Developing suction fan Appendix-3 9-I

CB Main control board Appendix-3 1-G FM6 Internal dehumidifying fan /2 Appendix-3 7-I

FCB Fixing control board Appendix-1 6-B FM7 Internal cooling fan /2 Appendix-4 9-I

INDEX Index sensor board Appendix-4 3-A MC1 Registration clutch Appendix-3 6-I

L1INVB Exposure lamp power supply board Appendix-4 2-E MC2 Loop clutch Appendix-4 6-I

LCDB Display board Appendix-1 5-F SD1 1st paper feed solenoid /U Appendix-4 3-I

LDB LD drive board Appendix-4 2-A SD2 1st paper feed solenoid /L Appendix-4 2-I

OB Operation board Appendix-1 6-F SD3 By-pass paper feed solenoid Appendix-4 3-I

PAKB Panel key board Appendix-1 4-F SD4 Cleaning web solenoid Appendix-3 6-I

PFDB/L Paper feed detection board /L Appendix-4 5-I SD5 ADU gate solenoid Appendix-3 5-I

PFDB/U Paper feed detection board /U Appendix-4 4-I SD7 Separation claw solenoid Appendix-3 7-E

PRMB Parameter memory board Appendix-2 5-F SD8 Gate solenoid Appendix-4 7-I

PSW2B Power SW2 board Appendix-1 6-I SD9 Toner solenoid Appendix-3 4-I

SCB System control board Appendix-1 8-E PS1 Registration sensor Appendix-4 1-I

SCDB Scanner drive board Appendix-4 1-B PS2 Fixing exit sensor Appendix-3 5-E

TCSB Toner control sensor board Appendix-3 6-E PS4 ADU sensor Appendix-4 4-I

DCPS DC power supply unit Appendix-1 2-A PS5 Toner bottle sensor Appendix-3 5-I

HV High voltage unit Appendix-3 2-E PS7 Upper limit sensor /U Appendix-4 2-I

INV1 Exposure lamp inverter Appendix-4 2-D PS8 No paper sensor /U Appendix-4 1-I

INV2 Display inverter Appendix-1 4-H PS9 Tray set sensor /U Appendix-4 1-I

CBR1 Circuit breaker /1 Appendix-1 2-A PS10 Upper limit sensor /L Appendix-4 5-I

CBR2 Circuit breaker /2 Appendix-1 2-B PS11 No paper sensor /L Appendix-4 5-I

NF Noise filter Appendix-1 3-A PS12 Tray set sensor /L Appendix-4 1-I

L1 Exposure lamp Appendix-4 2-F PS13 By-pass no paper sensor Appendix-4 3-I

L2 Fixing heater lamp /1 Appendix-1 8-B PS14 Scanner home position sensor Appendix-4 3-E

L3 Fixing heater lamp /2 Appendix-1 8-B PS15 APS timing sensor Appendix-4 3-E

PCL Pre-charging lamp Appendix-3 7-E PS17 APS sensor Appendix-4 3-E

TSL Transfer synchronization lamp Appendix-4 5-I PS20 By-pass tray paper size sensor Appendix-4 3-I

LCD LCD Appendix-1 4-F PS21 Timing sensor /U Appendix-4 2-I

BL Back light Appendix-1 5-H PS22 Timing sensor /L Appendix-4 2-I

M1 Main motor Appendix-3 2-I PS23 IT exit sensor /U Appendix-4 7-I


Appendix-6

7.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

A

B

C

D

E

G

H

7 8 9

7 8 9

Symbol


Relay connector

NDIX

5 FS-114 Overall Wiring Diagram

1

F

I

2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

SK-114

SK-114SK-114

PK-114

Staple Needle Empty Detect Sensor

Staple Home Detect SensorStaple Selfpriming Detect Sensor

Pun

ch U

nit S

ettin

g 1s

t Det

ectio

nG

ND

Chopper Unit Setting DetectionGND

Pun

ch U

nit S

ettin

g 2n

d D

etec

tion

GN

DP

unch

Uni

t Set

ting

3rd

Det

ectio

nG

ND

K APPENDIX

Appendix-7


Symbol Part name LocationPK-114 PK-114 1-ESK-114 SK-114 1-A, 1-DCL1-FN Registration clutch 7-BM1-FN Exit motor 7-EM2-FN Transport motor 7-CM3-FN Entrance motor 7-CM4-FN Allignment motor 1 7-GM5-FN Allignment motor 2 7-FM6-FN Exit open/close motor 7-BM7-FN Stapling unit moving motor 7-EM11-FN Elevator motor 7-GM12-FN Shutter opening motor 7-GPC3-FN Elevator tray home position sensor 7-IPC4-FN Entrance sensor 7-BPC5-FN Transport sensor 7-APC6-FN Alignment home position sensor 1 7-FPC7-FN Alignment home position sensor 2 7-FPC8-FN Storage tray detecting sensor 7-EPC10-FN Staple home position sensor 7-DPC11-FN Exit paddle home position sensor 7-DPC12-FN Exit roller home position sensor 7-APC14-FN Elevator tray lower limit sensor 7-HPC15-FN Top face detection sensor 7-IPC16-FN Shutter home position sensor 7-HS1-FN Front cover open/close detection SW 2-CS2-FN Shutter detection SW 7-HS3-FN Elevate tray upper/lower limit SW 7-GS4-FN Transport jam detection SW 7-ASL1-FN Storage paddle solenoid 7-BSL2-FN Exit paddle solenoid 7-CM1-PK Punch motor 2-GPC1-PK Punch trash full sensor 2-EPC2-PK Punch motor pulse sensor 2-FPC3-PK Punch positioning sensor 1 2-FPC4-PK Punch positioning sensor 2 2-FPWB-A FN Main control board 3-BPWB-B FN Elevator board 5-H

k-7145fs_rev5

Documents

Transcript of k-7145fs_rev5